JP7496804B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be played.

As a typical example of an amusement machine, a pachinko machine, there is a machine that executes control to display a normal background display during a first customer waiting period after the variable display of the symbols has ended, and to display a demonstration display during a second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period has ended (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-22196 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above, the demonstration display only started when the first customer waiting period ended and the second customer waiting period began, so there was room for improvement in customer waiting control.

The present invention was developed to address these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can provide optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene,
the title name display scene is composed of a main title name display part which displays a character display of a main title name of the gaming machine, and then a subtitle name display part which displays a character display of a subtitle name of the gaming machine;
The light emission control means
at a timing when the main title display part is switched to the subtitle display part, the light emitting means is controlled using luminance data for the subtitle display part corresponding to the subtitle display part;
When a specific error occurs, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error luminance data table;
the luminance data for the subtitle name display part is luminance data for making the light-emitting means emit light in a light-emitting mode linked to an animation of the character display of the subtitle name,
The period from the occurrence of the cause of the specific error to the start of control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is shorter than the period from the resolution of the specific error to the end of control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table (FIG. 29, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in that order, and the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed. Therefore, by illuminating the light-emitting means in conjunction with the display animation of the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a demo performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a demo performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a demo performance control process. (A1) and (A2) are figures showing the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) are figures showing the second presentation mode, and (C1) and (C2) are figures showing the third presentation mode. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 22. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third presentation mode. 13A is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first presentation mode, and FIG. 13B is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the second and third presentation modes. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation in a low base state. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation in a high base state. 13A shows the start and end conditions for displaying a demo movie, and FIG. 13B shows the configuration of the demo movie display. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in a demo movie. This is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demo performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a demo movie display operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a demo movie display operation. 13A is a display example of the first scene (company name), FIG. 13B is a display example of the fourth scene (warning 1), and FIG. 13C is a display example of the fourth scene (warning 2). This is a diagram comparing the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and small patterns. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing the light emission patterns of lamps corresponding to game states. 1A is a diagram showing the arrangement of lamps in a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of FIG. (A1) to (A8) are figures showing an example of operation when a customer waiting demo performance is introduced after the variable display of the first special pattern in a low base state has ended. 37(A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing the main part of FIG. 37. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of a customer waiting demo presentation in a low base state. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of a customer waiting demo presentation in a low base state. (B1) to (B8) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of a customer waiting demo presentation in a high base state. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of a customer waiting demo presentation in a high base state. A figure showing an example of operation when a pachinko gaming machine is started with a cold start and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of a pachinko gaming machine starting a customer waiting demo performance after being started by a cold start. A figure showing an example of operation when a pachinko game machine is hot started in a low base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the start of a customer waiting demo performance after a pachinko gaming machine is started with a hot start in a low base state. A figure showing an example of operation when a pachinko game machine is started with a hot start in a high base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the start of a customer waiting demo presentation after a pachinko gaming machine is started with a hot start in a high base state. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends over time in a high base state. 11A to 11E are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends with a starting win in a low base state. 54(A) to 54(G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 53. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a low base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a low base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a high base state. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of operation when a demo movie display is ended by steering operation in a low base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a process in which the demo movie display ends in response to a steering wheel operation in a low base state. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of operation when a demo movie display is ended by a menu operation in a low base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a demo movie display ends by a menu operation in a low base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a demo movie display ends by a menu operation in a high base state. 13A is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device when a prize is won, and FIG. 13B is a timing chart showing an example of erroneous operation of the payout device when a prize is won. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a bulb failure error occurs during a customer waiting demo performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a priority layer. This figure shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance that is started in a low base state. This figure shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance that starts in a high base state. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for outputting to an LED driver. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a parent table constituting a lamp data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a child table constituting a lamp data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a grandchild table constituting a lamp data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a grandchild table constituting a lamp data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a grandchild table constituting a lamp data table; A diagram showing a lamp data table used when not playing (only the button flashing white and the button flashing red are used during play). Lamp Data Table: Background Normal Parent Table Settings. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: background normal child table. FIG. Lamp Data Table: Background Normal Grandchild Table Settings. Lamp Data Table: Background Normal Grandchild Table Settings. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of background time reduction. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the child table of background time reduction. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of background time reduction. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for background probability change. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the background probability change child table. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the background probability change grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the background probability change grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: button white lighting. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the child table for the button white lighting. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of the button white lighting. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button blinking in white. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the button blinking white child table. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the table for indicating that the button is blinking white. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button flashing red. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the child table for the button flashing red. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of the button red flashing. FIG. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of a parent table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of a child table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of initialization notification. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of an error. Lamp data table: a diagram showing the setting contents of an error child table. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the setting contents of an error grandchild table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a common table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a common table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a common table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a common table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a common table. 1A to 1C are diagrams showing examples of character display and light emission modes in each scene. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a first scene, FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a third scene, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a fourth scene. 1 is a comparison table showing character animation displays. 1A and 1B are diagrams for explaining similar colors. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display timing list of a demo movie display. 54(A) to 54(G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 53.

The following describes how to implement the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
Before the display means switches from the background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table for the background display is switched to the luminance data table for the demonstration display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 18, 19, 38, 39, 40, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a step-by-step design in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched on first and then the demonstration display starts makes it possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting everything at once, and to make people aware of the start of the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table;
before the display means switches the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table is switched from the normal state background display luminance data table to the demonstration display luminance data table to control the light emitting means;
Before the display means switches the display from the special status background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table for the special status background display is switched to the luminance data table for the demonstration display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 18, 19, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a step-by-step design in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched on first and then the display of the demonstration display is started makes it possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting everything at once, and to make people aware of the start of the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1,
The luminance data used initially in the luminance data table for demonstration display is data that emits light in a color different from the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for normal state background display and the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for special state background display (Figures 80, 84, 88, 92, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the color of the last luminance data during the normal state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display, and the color of the last luminance data during the special state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display. Therefore, when the demonstration display starts in each state, the change in color of the light-emitting means stands out, making it easy to understand that the demonstration display is starting, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
the third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In the first period and the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the background display luminance data table and the demonstration display luminance data table (FIGS. 29, 38, 39, 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the state of the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation. Therefore, by keeping the state constant, this mistake can be prevented, and as a result, ideal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
the third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the normal state ends, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the luminance data table for demonstration display;
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the third light-emitting means using one luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the normal state background display, the luminance data table for the special state background display, and the luminance data table for the demonstration display;
during a first period after a game in the special state is ended, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the normal state ends, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table;
In a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table (FIGS. 29, 38, 39, 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the state of the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation. Therefore, by keeping the state constant in both the normal and special states, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused in either the normal or special state, and as a result, it is possible to carry out ideal customer waiting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
the third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a first scene and a second scene;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means in the first scene in the second period by using a first scene luminance data table corresponding to the first scene;
controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means in the second scene in the second period by using a second scene luminance data table corresponding to the second scene;
controlling the third light-emitting means by using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the first scene and the luminance data table for the second scene in the second period;
In the second scene in the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one luminance data table (FIGS. 29, 38, 39, 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the state of the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation. Therefore, by keeping the state constant, this mistake can be prevented, and as a result, ideal customer waiting control can be achieved.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1, aspect 4-1, or aspect 5-1,
The first luminance data table is a luminance data table different from the promotion performance luminance data table used when a promotion performance for encouraging the operation of the performance operation means is executed, and the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table has less change in luminance than the luminance data constituting the promotion performance luminance data table (Figures 97 to 105, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, one brightness data table is composed of brightness data for making the brightness data less emphasized than when the operation of the performance operation means is being prompted, thereby preventing the player from mistakenly thinking that he or she is being prompted to operate the performance operation means, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1, aspect 4-1, or aspect 5-1,
The first brightness data table is characterized in that it is composed of brightness data for turning off the light.
According to this feature, one brightness data table is composed of brightness data for turning off the light, which prevents the player from misunderstanding that he is being prompted to operate the performance operation means, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-4 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1, aspect 4-1, or aspect 5-1,
The first light emitting means is provided on the game board,
The second light emitting means and the third light emitting means are provided on the game frame (FIG. 36, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation is provided in the game slot, but by managing it separately rather than using the same brightness data table as the other light-emitting means provided in the game slot, it is possible to appropriately design the device to prevent the player from mistakingly believing that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation, and as a result, it is possible to provide optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1, aspect 4-1, or aspect 5-1,
The display means displays a message indicating that the device is starting up after the device is powered on,
The light emission control means includes:
controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is running;
The third light-emitting means is controlled using one brightness data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is activated (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using the brightness data table to emit light before the background is displayed, it is possible to check whether the light emitting means is normal at the start-up stage, and then the light emitting mode can be seamlessly changed to the one for waiting customers, resulting in optimal control of waiting for customers.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, a warning display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the name of a company related to the gaming machine is displayed in text,
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which textual display of a warning is displayed when playing the gaming machine,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which text introducing the gaming machine is displayed,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which text introduction of the gaming machine is displayed,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the title name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a title name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
In the attention-calling display scene in the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled by using a luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene corresponding to the attention-calling display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using one luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene, the luminance data table for the title name display scene, and the luminance data table for the warning display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table (FIG. 29, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.

The company name includes the name of the company involved in the development, manufacturing, and sales of the gaming machine.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text displays, and since it is desired to emphasize each piece of information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, each piece can be highlighted by emitting a dedicated light to highlight it in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
There is another scene between the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene.
In other scenes, a luminance data table different from the first luminance data table is used (e.g., FIG. 29).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a common brightness data table is used in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, so that suitable light emission can be achieved without increasing capacity, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
the execution period of the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene (30 sec)>the execution period of the company name display scene (10 sec), and the execution period of the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene (30 sec)>the execution period of the warning display scene (5 sec),
A distinctive feature of this system is that the company name and warning text may be displayed at times other than during the demonstration display.
According to this feature, the model introduction scene and the title name display scene that are displayed only during the demonstration display can be highlighted for a longer period of time, thereby achieving suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
the company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is animated;
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which text display introducing the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which a character display introducing the gaming machine is animated.
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the one luminance data table;
the company name display scene luminance data table includes luminance data linked to an animation of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine,
The one brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the introduction of the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene and brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the introduction of the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (FIGS. 29, 31, 32, 91 to 98, 119).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are several scenes in which information is conveyed by displaying text, but since it is particularly desired to convey information about a company name, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, it is possible to emphasize the name in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene;
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters as an animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which text display introducing the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which a character display introducing the gaming machine is animated.
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the title name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a title name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table different from the title name display luminance data table in the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period;
The title name display scene brightness data table includes brightness data linked to an animation of the character display of the title name of the gaming machine,
The one brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the introduction of the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene and brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the introduction of the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (FIGS. 29, 31, 32, 91 to 98, 119).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are several scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since it is particularly desired to convey information about the model name, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, it is possible to emphasize it in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the name of a company related to the gaming machine is displayed in text,
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which textual display of a caution when playing the gaming machine is performed,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the title name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a title name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
In the attention-calling display scene in the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled by using a luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene corresponding to the attention-calling display scene;
the state of the light-emitting means controlled by using the luminance data table for the company name display scene is emphasized more than the state of the light-emitting means controlled by using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene,
The state of the light-emitting means controlled by using the luminance data table for the title name display scene is emphasized more than the state of the light-emitting means controlled by using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene (FIG. 28, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, and since it is desired to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, this can be emphasized by emitting dedicated light for each piece. In particular, by emphasizing the lighting state of the company name and model title display scenes compared to warning scenes, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-1,
The manner in which the state of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the company name display scene is emphasized more than the state of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene, and the manner in which the state of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the title name display scene is emphasized more than the state of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene are any of the following: (1) A manner in which there is a lot of blinking; (2) A manner in which there are a lot of colors that are lit up; and (3) A large number of light-emitting means are used (Figure 28, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the company name and the model title can be emphasized, resulting in an optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-1,
The aspect of the light-emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the company name display scene is characterized in that it is more emphasized than the aspect of the light-emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the title name display scene.
According to this feature, the company name can be more emphasized, and it is possible to clearly appeal to players which company the gaming machine is related to, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a model introduction scene,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the model introduction scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a model introduction display scene luminance data table corresponding to the model introduction display scene;
the plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the company name display scene are luminance data configured to be emitted by the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means,
The plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the model introduction scene are luminance data configured so that the first light-emitting means emits light and the second light-emitting means does not emit light (FIG. 29, FIG. 90 to FIG. 98).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are a number of scenes in which information is conveyed by text display; in the company name display scene, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are made to emit light, and in the model introduction scene, the first light-emitting means emits light but the second light-emitting means does not emit light, thereby making it possible to relatively emphasize the company name display scene, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for a first model introduction display scene corresponding to the first model introduction display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for a second model introduction display scene corresponding to the second model introduction display scene;
The second light-emitting means is controlled using one luminance data table in the first model introduction scene in the second period and in the second model introduction scene in the second period.
According to this feature, there are a number of scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, and in the company name display scene, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are made to emit light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, and in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, the first light-emitting means is made to emit light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, but the second light-emitting means is made to emit light in a common light-emitting mode, thereby making it possible to relatively emphasize the company name display scene, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table;
When a specific effect is executed, the light emitting means is controlled using a rainbow luminance data table;
The rainbow luminance data table used in the second period and the rainbow luminance data table used when the specific performance is executed are a common luminance data table (FIGS. 28, 31, 32, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more vibrant, and further, by making the brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow common to the brightness data table used in response to specific effects executed during play, there is no need to increase capacity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a rainbow luminance data table;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using a rainbow luminance data table;
When a specific effect executable in the normal state and a special effect executable in the special state are executed, the light emitting means is controlled using a rainbow luminance data table;
The rainbow luminance data table used in the second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the rainbow luminance data table used in the second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, and the rainbow luminance data table used when a specific effect executable in the normal state and a special effect executable in the special state are executed are common luminance data tables (FIGS. 28, 31, 32, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more vibrant, and further, by making the brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow common to the brightness data table used in response to specific effects that can be executed in the normal state and special effects that can be executed in the special state, there is no need to increase capacity, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

The gaming machine of aspect 12-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 12-1,
The specific effects and the special effects are characterized in that they are effects that definitively notify the player that they are being controlled to an advantageous state.
According to this feature, the brightness data table used for the performance that is determined to be controlled to an advantageous state is also used for the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene,
the title name display scene is composed of a main title name display part which displays a character display of a main title name of the gaming machine, and then a subtitle name display part which displays a character display of a subtitle name of the gaming machine;
the light emission control means controls the light emission means at a timing when the main title display part is switched to the subtitle name display part, using a subtitle name display part luminance data table corresponding to the subtitle name display part;
The brightness data table for the subtitle name display part is a brightness data table for making the light-emitting means emit light in a lighting mode linked to the animation of the character display of the subtitle name based on a plurality of brightness data (see FIG. 29, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in that order, and the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed. Therefore, by illuminating the light-emitting means in conjunction with the display animation of the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is animated;
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters as an animation,
The warning display scene is a scene in which a character display of a warning to a player when playing the gaming machine is displayed in an animated manner,
the animated display of the text display of the company name related to the gaming machine is emphasized more than the animated display of the text display of the caution when playing the gaming machine,
The animation display of the title name of the gaming machine is more emphasized than the animation display of the text display of the caution when playing the gaming machine (FIGS. 120, 121, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by displaying text, and since it is desired to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, this can be emphasized by displaying each piece with a dedicated display animation. In particular, by emphasizing the display animation of the company name and model title display scenes compared to warning scenes, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene and a warning display scene,
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which textual display of a caution when playing the gaming machine is performed,
The display means includes:
In the title name display scene, the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is animated at a specified display position;
Then, the title name of the game machine is animated.
In the attention-calling display scene, a character display of a warning to a player when playing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation at a specified display position;
After that, the text display of the caution when playing the gaming machine is displayed without animation (FIG. 120, FIG. 121, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display of the game title name is given a lingering movement to draw attention to the title, and the attention is drawn to the title without any lingering movement, so that the characters can be read clearly, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The demonstration display includes a warning display scene,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which textual display of a warning is displayed when playing the gaming machine,
the attention-calling display scene is composed of a first attention-calling display part that displays a text display of an attention-call for a first event, and a second attention-calling display part that displays a text display of an attention-call for a second event,
The background color of the text display in the first attention-calling display part is different from the background color of the text display in the second attention-calling display part (FIGS. 33, 34, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using different background colors to draw attention to different events, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when the event changes, thereby enabling optimal control of customer waiting.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a warning display scene,
the company name display scene is a scene in which the name of a company related to the gaming machine is displayed in text,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which textual display of a caution when playing the gaming machine is performed,
The background color of the character display in the company name display scene is different from the background color of the character display in the warning display scene (FIGS. 33, 34, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using different background colors for the company name display and the warning notice, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when they switch, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
After the second period ends, the background display is displayed again;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
Before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the background display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the background display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 50, 51, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a step-by-step design is adopted in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched on first, and then the background display starts, thereby preventing a bad feeling when the demonstration display ends, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
After the second period in the normal state ends, the normal state background display is displayed again;
After a second period in the special state has ended, displaying the special state background display again;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table;
before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal state background display, the luminance data table is switched from the demonstration display luminance data table to the normal state background display luminance data table to control the light emitting means;
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the special status background display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the special status background display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 50 to 52, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched on first and then the background display starts, it is possible to prevent a bad feeling from being felt when the demonstration display ends, and furthermore, the state of the lamp can be quickly notified to the player, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is satisfied,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the variable display is ended, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIGS. 53 to 58, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is satisfied,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the variable display in the normal state is terminated;
displaying a special status background display during a first period after the variable display in the special status is terminated;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the special state has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means
during a first period after the variable display in the normal state is ended, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the variable display in the special state is ended, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for special state background display corresponding to the special state background display;
during a second period following the end of a first period following the end of the variable display in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
during a second period following the end of a first period following the end of the variable display in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state, thereby controlling the light emitting means;
When the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIGS. 53 to 58, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is satisfied, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is satisfied,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
displaying a background display during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed;
displaying the background display during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information can be displayed,
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means
during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table;
In a second period after the first period after the first special identification information ends, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after the first period after the second special identification information ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for demonstration display;
when the first start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information, thereby controlling the light emitting means;
When the second start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information, and the light emitting means is controlled (Figures 53 to 58, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of which of the starting conditions is satisfied, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the starting conditions have been satisfied and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is satisfied,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the variable display is ended, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable display of the effect identification information is displayed so that a transparency of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
When the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value (FIGS. 25, 54, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, it is possible to inform the customer that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is satisfied,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the variable display in the normal state is terminated;
displaying a special status background display during a first period after the variable display in the special status is terminated;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the special state has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable display of the effect identification information is displayed so that a transparency of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
When the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed in the normal state, before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state, and is displayed;
In the special state, when the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information in the special state (FIGS. 25, 54, 124, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in either the normal state or the special state, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, it is possible to inform the customer that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is satisfied, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is satisfied,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
displaying a background display during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed;
displaying the background display during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information can be displayed,
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information can be displayed,
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable display of the effect identification information is displayed so that a transparency of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
When the first start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value, the demonstration display is switched to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information,
When the second start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information (FIGS. 25, 54, 124, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of which start condition is met, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, it is possible to inform the customer that the start condition has been met and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is satisfied,
A launch operation means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the variable display is ended, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
when the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the background display and displayed;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table for the background display and controls the light emitting means before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the background display (FIGS. 59, 60, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify the user that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the launch operating means, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A menu operation means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to a menu display and displayed;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the menu is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled using a menu display luminance data table corresponding to the menu display;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the menu display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 61 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the menu operation means, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A menu operation means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to a menu display and displayed;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for demonstration display;
When the menu is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled using a menu display luminance data table corresponding to the menu display;
when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the menu display to control the light emitting means;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the menu display and the light emitting means is controlled before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display (FIGS. 61 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the menu operation means has been operated and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature results in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
After the second period ends, displaying a switching display, and then displaying the background display;
When the demonstration display is being displayed, if an interruption condition is met, the demonstration display is switched to the background display without displaying the switching display (FIGS. 50 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the end of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing as an abrupt change by inserting a switching display, and the end of the demonstration display due to an interruption condition is made to appear as an abrupt change without an interrupting switching display, so that by contrasting these events, it is possible to highlight in particular the fact that the demonstration display ended due to an interruption, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
After the second period in the normal state ends, displaying a switching display, and then displaying the normal state background display;
After the second period in the special state has ended, display the switching indication, and then display the special state background indication;
When the demonstration display is displayed in the normal state, if an interruption condition is met, the demonstration display is switched to the normal state background display without displaying the switching display.

When the demonstration display is displayed in the special state, if the interrupt condition is met, the demonstration display is switched to the special state background display without displaying the switching display (FIGS. 50 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, the end of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing as a sudden change by inserting a switching display in between, and the end of the demonstration display due to an interruption condition is made to appear as a sudden change without an interrupting switching display, so that by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the fact that the display ended due to an interruption, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

[Mode 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying a guide display related to the performance adjustment at the display start timing of the background display;
Then, display the demonstration display,
Thereafter, the background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed at a timing when the background display starts;
When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on with initialization,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying a guide display related to performance adjustment at a display start timing of the background display;
Thereafter, displaying said demonstration display;
Thereafter, the background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed at the display start timing of the background display (FIGS. 44 and 45).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the start-up situation before an amusement store opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization). In either case of start-up, an amusement store staff member can check the displays by checking the background display after powering on, checking the demonstration display, and checking the guide display, thereby improving the efficiency of the check. Furthermore, when the background display is displayed when the amusement store opens and players are welcomed, the guide display will be the background display, so that proper guidance can be given to adjustments to the presentation from the timing of the start of play, and a suitable gaming environment can be provided to players, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Mode 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special status background display in the special status;
In the normal state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the normal state background display is displayed without displaying a guide display related to the performance adjustment at the display start timing of the normal state background display;
Then, display the demonstration display,
Thereafter, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display at a display start timing of the normal state background display;
In the special state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the special state background display is displayed without displaying a guide display regarding performance adjustment at a display start timing of the special state background display;
Thereafter, displaying said demonstration display;
Thereafter, the special status background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display at the timing when the special status background display starts (FIGS. 46 to 49, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the start-up state before the gaming establishment opens can be either a normal state or a special state, and in order to make it possible to check in the background which state the establishment has started up in, no information display is displayed to avoid any intrusion, and if the background is subsequently displayed again, it is highly likely that the state has already been confirmed, so by displaying the information display from the timing at which the background display starts to be displayed, if the background display is displayed when the gaming establishment opens and players are welcomed, it will be the background display that displays the information display, so that proper guidance can be given to adjustments to the presentation from the timing at which play begins, and a suitable gaming environment can be provided to players, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Mode 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, after the variable display is finished,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guide display related to the performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guide display;
Then, a demonstration display is displayed, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display is completed,
A special status background display is displayed without displaying a guide display related to the performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while displaying the guide display;
Then, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in either the normal state or the special state, by not displaying a guide immediately after the end of the fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the player from being prompted to make unnecessary adjustments to the presentation, and since there is a possibility that the player will have left their seat once the demonstration display has ended, by prompting the player to make adjustments to the presentation immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is satisfied, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is satisfied,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guide display related to the performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guide display;
Then, a demonstration display is displayed, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display;
In the normal state, after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed,
displaying the normal state background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
Then, the demonstration display is displayed, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed,
displaying a special status background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special status background display while displaying the guidance display;
Then, displaying the demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the special status background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed,
displaying the special status background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special status background display while displaying the guidance display;
Then, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the change of the first special identification information has finished in either the normal state or the special state, or even after the change of the second special identification information has finished, a guidance display is not displayed immediately after the change has finished, thereby preventing unnecessary prompting for adjustment of the presentation, and since there is a possibility that the player has left his/her seat once the demonstration display has finished, by prompting the player to adjust the presentation as soon as the demonstration display is switched to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
After the variable display is completed,
displaying a background display without displaying a guide display relating to the performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, displaying the guide display in a specific animation so as to be superimposed on the background display;
Then, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is displayed in the specific animation so as to be superimposed on the background display (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not displaying the information immediately after the change has ended, it is possible to prevent the player from being prompted to make more adjustments to the presentation than necessary, and once the demonstration display has ended, by prompting the player to make adjustments to the presentation immediately after the display switches from the demonstration display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and further, by displaying the information immediately after the display switches from the demonstration display to the background display using the same animation as when the information display is displayed after the change has ended, it is possible to appeal to the player that the information display has been displayed without incurring any costs, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, after the variable display is ended, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the variable display is ended, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period has elapsed;
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on. Then, a second specific period of time elapses, and the demonstration display is displayed.
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is turned on, the second specific period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 39, 42, 47, 49, 123, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the fluctuation has ended, there is a possibility that the player has not yet been replaced, which would be annoying, so a longer time is set, and since an arcade attendant, not a player, is present after the power is turned on, a shorter time is set so that the arcade attendant can immediately check the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, after the variable display is ended, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the variable display is ended, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period has elapsed;
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then power is turned on with initialization, and then a second specific period has elapsed, whereby the demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and then power-on with initialization is performed. Then, the second specific period elapses, and the demonstration display is displayed.
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 39, 42, 45, 123, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the end of the fluctuation, there is a possibility that the player has not yet been replaced, which would be annoying, so a longer time is set, and since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the starting method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement store, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, gaming store staff can immediately check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, which results in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on. Then, a first specific period of time elapses, and a demonstration display is displayed.
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is turned on, the first specific period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed;
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then power is turned on with initialization, and then a second specific period has elapsed, whereby the demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and then power-on with initialization is performed. Then, the second specific period elapses, and the demonstration display is displayed.
The first specific period is a period longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 45, 47, 49, 123, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement establishment, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, gaming establishment staff can immediately check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, which results in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 39]
The gaming machine of embodiment 39-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, after the variable display is ended, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display is ended, a predetermined period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed again;
In the special state, after the variable display is ended, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display is ended, the demonstration display is displayed again when the predetermined period has elapsed;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when a second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display ends, the demonstration display is displayed again when the predetermined period has elapsed;
In the special state, after a power outage occurs and power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display ends, the demonstration display is displayed again when the predetermined period has elapsed;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 39, 42, 45, 123, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the end of the fluctuation, there is a possibility that the player has not been replaced and it would be annoying, so a longer time is set, and since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement store, by making the demonstration display displayed immediately, gaming store staff can immediately check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, and further, by making the period of time until the demonstration display is displayed again after the demonstration display is displayed once the same in any of the situations, that is, after the end of the fluctuation in the normal state, after the end of the fluctuation in the special state, and after a cold start, a demo movie can be shown stably, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (FIGS. 65 to 67, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by continuing to use the lamp to notify of specific errors that occur during play whether the background is being displayed or the demonstration is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of specific errors, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during a game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state is ended, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (FIGS. 65 to 68, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by allowing the lamp to continue to notify of specific errors that occur during play in both the normal and special states, whether the background is being displayed or the demonstration is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of specific errors, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is satisfied, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is satisfied,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
displaying a background display during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed;
displaying the background display during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using the background display luminance data table;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is ended, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error.
Then, in a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Then, in a second period after the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is ended, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during the variable display of the second special identification information, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Then, in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (FIGS. 65 to 68, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by allowing the lamp notification of a specific error that occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information to be continued and executed both during background display and during demonstration display, it is possible to provide stable notification of specific errors, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued,
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for demonstration display and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors have different colors that account for a large proportion of the luminance data (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for a demonstration display to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the demonstration display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control to be performed.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
The luminance data constituting the background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different colors that account for a large proportion of the luminance data (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for background display to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during a game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state is ended, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Then, in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
the luminance data constituting the normal state background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different colors that occupy a large proportion of the luminance data,
The luminance data constituting the special status background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different colors that account for a large proportion of the data (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for normal status background display are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data, and the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for special status background display are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data, so that regardless of which background is being displayed, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the background display, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using luminance data for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs during the second period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the luminance data for the demonstration display;
The colors that make up a large proportion of the luminance data for the demonstration display and the luminance data for the specific error are different (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the demonstration display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control to be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error has not occurred during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using background display luminance data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs during the first period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the background display luminance data;
The colors that make up the majority of the luminance data for background display and the luminance data for specific errors are different (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for a specific error and the luminance data for background display to have different main colors, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using normal state background display luminance data corresponding to the normal state background display;
In a first period after the game in the special state is ended, if the specific error does not occur, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using special state background display luminance data corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the normal state background display luminance data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
Controlling the second light emitting means using the luminance data for the special status background display;
The normal state background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data have different colors that occupy a large proportion of the data,
The colors that make up the majority of the luminance data for the special status background display and the luminance data for the specific error are different (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for a specific error and the luminance data for normal status background display to have different main colors in the luminance data, and by configuring the luminance data for a specific error and the luminance data for special status background display to have different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display in either the normal status or the special status, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued,
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for demonstration display and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for a demonstration display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting mode during the demonstration display, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued,
The luminance data constituting the background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player differs (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting state during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 51]
The gaming machine of form 51-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during a game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state is ended, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Then, in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
The luminance data constituting the normal state background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured so that the light emitting operation state of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different,
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the special state background and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for normal state background display, and by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for special state background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light emitting state during the background display regardless of which background is being displayed, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using luminance data for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs during the second period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the luminance data for the demonstration display;
The luminance data for the demonstration display and the luminance data for the specific error are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are different (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting state during the demonstration display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control to be performed.

[Mode 53]
The gaming machine of form 53-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error has not occurred during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using background display luminance data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs during the first period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the background display luminance data;
The light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are configured to be different from each other based on the background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for the background display, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting state during the background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using normal state background display luminance data corresponding to the normal state background display;
In a first period after the game in the special state is ended, if the specific error does not occur, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using special state background display luminance data corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the normal state background display luminance data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
Controlling the second light emitting means using the luminance data for the special status background display;
The normal state background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by a player are different from each other;
The light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are configured to be different from each other by the luminance data for displaying the special state background and the luminance data for the specific error (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for normal state background display, and by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for special state background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting mode during background display, regardless of whether the state is normal or special, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A payout unit that pays out game media;
A detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game media is satisfied, and the detection means does not detect the game media, and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during the second period, in either case where game media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing section or game media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing section, the light emitting section switches from the specific error brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table at a timing related to the detection of the first game medium distributed by the detection means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of gaming balls dispensed to the payout section, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the demonstration display at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first gaming ball, so that the demonstration display can be made to look natural and the processing can be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A payout unit that pays out game media;
A detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game media is satisfied, and the detection means does not detect the game media, and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means is
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued,
When the specific error occurs during the first period, in either case where game media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing section or game media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing section, the light emitting section switches from the specific error luminance data table to the background display luminance data table at a timing related to the detection of the first game medium distributed by the detection section (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of gaming balls dispensed to the payout section, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the background display at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first gaming ball, so that the background display can be quickly made to look natural and the processing can be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A payout unit that pays out game media;
A detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game media is satisfied, and the detection means does not detect the game media, and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
during the second period, if a condition for paying out game media is established and a period during which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error to control the light emitting means;
When the specific error occurs during the second period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the luminance data table for the specific error is switched to the luminance data table for the demonstration display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the detection means does not detect a ball, this may be due to a specific error, but it may also be due to a delayed ball, etc., so the light emission mode of the light emitting means is not immediately switched. When a game ball is detected, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the demonstration display, so that the demonstration display can be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, ideal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of form 58-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A payout unit that pays out game media;
A detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game media is satisfied, and the detection means does not detect the game media, and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
during the first period, when a condition for paying out game media is established and a period during which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, switching from the background display brightness data table to a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error to control the light emitting means;
When the specific error occurs during the first period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the luminance data table for specific errors is switched to the luminance data table for background display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the detection means does not detect a ball, this may be due to a specific error, but it may also be due to a delayed ball, etc., so the light emission mode of the light emitting means is not immediately switched. When a game ball is detected, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the background display, so that the background display can be made to look natural, and as a result, ideal customer waiting control can be performed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

Next, an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the near side of FIG. 1 is the front (front face, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side is the rear (rear face, back) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing with the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "004SGS1", "Normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach", and "Super reach" may be abbreviated to "SP reach".

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided at the top left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small symbol, the error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the right-hit notification image 004SG201 (see FIG. 21) that prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation, and the remaining time-saving display 004SG202 (see FIG. 21) indicating the number of remaining time-saving turns are displayed in front of the performance images such as characters (higher layer), thereby preventing the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the small symbol, and the error display, while the decorative symbol may be displayed behind the performance images (lower layer), thereby preventing the decorative symbol from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The small pattern is also called the fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable body 32 covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Also, the performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command.

The pattern displayed on the fourth pattern display device provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7 at a specified location on the game board 2), such as the first special pattern LED or the second special pattern LED, is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there are provided display areas (special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying reserved displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. The reserved displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided, but a first special pattern reserved memory display area in which a first reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special pattern is pending is displayed, and a second special pattern reserved memory display area in which a second reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special pattern is pending may be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided, and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. In addition, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also called "board lamps". In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are configured to include LEDs (see FIG. 36). In addition, the various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive performance in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board 004SG030, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The payout control board 004SG030 is connected to a payout device 004SG031 that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on receiving a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 004SG032 that is provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device 004SG031 pass, and it is possible to stop driving the payout device 004SG031 depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 004SG032.

The payout control board 004SG030 is also connected to a handle sensor 004SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 004SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 004SG030 controls the launcher 004SG033, which can launch game balls onto the game board 2. A signal indicating whether the touch ring 004SG35 is being detected and a signal indicating that the game ball has been launched by the launcher 004SG033 are input from the payout control board 004SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that there is a concept of upper, middle, and lower for each layer, and the higher the layer image, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

The VRAM area contains a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images from layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images from layer 2, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images from layer 3. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (composite) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area is an area in which an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area, is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set as the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set as the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set as the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5. In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing these images to display a first interface image at the bottom of the display screen of the image display device 5, which includes a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U that identifiably displays the first special pattern reserved memory count and the second special pattern reserved memory count, and a second interface image at the top left of the display screen of the image display device 5, which includes a small pattern that is smaller on the display screen than the decorative pattern and a reserved memory count display.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background display is drawn to display the background display across the entire display screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority, and are therefore displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, and is therefore displayed as the middle image in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background display) is set to have the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as the lower image in the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently on the display screen of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 3(A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 3(B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 3B, in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that a cold start refers to a state in which the data is initialized when the power is turned on, without restoring the data before the power is turned on, and the gaming machine is in a state in which various processes can be executed. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that a hot start refers to a state in which the gaming machine is in a state in which various processes can be executed based on the backed-up data when the power is turned on. A hot start is also called a power-on without initialization, since no initialization is performed when the power is turned on. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, time-saving with probability variable state). Note that the time-saving with probability variable state may simply be referred to as the "probability variable state". Command 96XXH is an error designation command that designates that an error has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 and that the error has been released.

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "0" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number has decreased). Command E100H is a customer waiting demo designation command that designates the execution of a customer waiting demo (demo performance). Command F100H is a frame status display designation command that designates the status of each input port (including the on/off status of the touch ring 004SG35).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 3(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball having entered each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 4, on the main board 11 side, numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result of a special symbol or other such in a special symbol game to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "0" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 5 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state so that when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot game state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B), a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C".

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 6(B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which after the jackpot game state ends, probable variable control and time-saving control are executed to transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "non-probable variable jackpot", in which after the jackpot game state ends, only time-saving control is executed to transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The variable probability control and time-saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C are ended on the condition that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, the time-saving control that is started after the end of the non-variable probability jackpot game state is ended on the condition that 100 variable displays are ended, or that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state before the 100 variable displays are ended. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is any of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C, the variable probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot game state ends, so that the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is called a consecutive state. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays unless the variable display result becomes a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, while when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 7 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, one normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, three types of fluctuation patterns are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns: super reach (no pseudo consecutive hits), super reach (one pseudo consecutive hit), and super reach (two pseudo consecutive hits), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns are as follows: a variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo consecutive hits) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-2); a variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo consecutive hit) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-3); and a variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo consecutive hits) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-4).

As shown in FIG. 7, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the variable display result is a non-variable jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a sure-win A to C, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is one or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern without shortening), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B. More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C. More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a high base state (time-saving state or probability-changing state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 80% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 10% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selection ratio of one of the multiple jackpot variable patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied according to the game state, for example, regardless of the jackpot type. In this way, the variable display is performed with a variable pattern suitable for the game state, which can increase the interest in the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 004SG150 as shown in FIG. 9 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 004SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 004SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 004SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 004SG151C, a game control flag setting section 004SG152, a game control timer setting section 004SG153, a game control counter setting section 004SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 004SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151A stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151B stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but which have not yet started.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 004SG151A associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the first start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 004SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 004SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 004SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in separate reserved memory units in association with the reserved number, the variable display based on the second reserved memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 004SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 004SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 004SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 004SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 004SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores not only a performance control program, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data holding area 004SG190 as shown in Figure 10 (A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 004SG190 shown in Figure 10 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 004SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 004SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 004SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 004SG194A as shown in FIG. 10 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special chart being variably displayed. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special chart being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, two commands, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 004SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 004SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 004SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "0" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory or the second special chart reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 004SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing in Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was fluctuating, it is sufficient if the fluctuating special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (step S8). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, the process enters a loop. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 12. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 12.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
14 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 13. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (004SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (004SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (004SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 004SGS102 is not the upper limit (004SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "0" (004SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 004SGS101 (004SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 004SGS102 (004SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (004SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (004SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (004SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in 004SGS105 (004SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "2" (004SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 004SGS103 and 004SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (004SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (004SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 004SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 (004SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random numbers extracted in this way and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserved information at the top of the empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit (004SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 004SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 004SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (004SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12.

Following the processing of 004SGS111, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (004SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

After executing the process of 004SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (004SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is advanced to. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid game ball start winning, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Fig. 13 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in Fig. 15, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (step 004SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 004SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; N), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" (step 004SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 004SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 004SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 004SGS144), and the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 004SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 004SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 004SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 004SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 004SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 004SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 004SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 004SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

In step 004SGS149, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 5 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 004SGS150). In addition, in this step 004SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of a jackpot is off and the game is in a low probability state (this feature is in a low probability, low base state), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result judgment table selected in step 004SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so in the processing of step 004SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine whether the special game display result is a "jackpot", so that when the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is judged (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 004SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 004SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 004SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot type the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 004SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 004SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as a variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is to be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, for example, the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, is set (step 004SGS155), and the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, it is set to "2", and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, it is set to "3". After processing step 004SGS155, proceed to step 004SGS156.

Also, if step 004SGS150 determines that the result is a miss (step 004SGS150; N), step 004SGS156 is executed without executing steps 004SGS152 to 004SGS155.

In step 004SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in response to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determined jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being "miss", a special symbol showing the symbol "-", which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be "jackpot" in step 004SGS150a, if the jackpot type in step 004SGS154 is "variable jackpot A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "C-type jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the fixed special symbol. Note that these fixed special symbols are only examples, and other fixed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 004SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 004SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 004SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 16. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 16 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update processing (step S77), a demo performance control processing (step S78) for executing a demo performance on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a background display update processing (step S79) for updating the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display, and a menu display processing (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in a game standby state are executed. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the first background display 004SG081 corresponding to the first presentation mode, the second background display 004SG082 corresponding to the second presentation mode, and the third background display 004SG083 corresponding to the third presentation mode is selected and displayed. The first background display 004SG081 can be displayed when the game state is in the normal state, the second background display 004SG082 can be displayed when the game state is in the low probability high base state, and the third background display 004SG083 can be displayed when the game state is in the high probability high base state.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes a process for adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and a process for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 17, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a reserve display update process (step S161) to perform a shift display, which will be described later, to update the reserved memory display (first reserved display 004SG101 or second reserved display 004SG102) in the special reserved memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 004SG194A. After the reserve display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed according to the value of the performance process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, a pre-reading preview setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process, in which judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading preview performance (such as a performance that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Demo performance control process)
Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figures 18 to 20 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step S78 in Figure 16. In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether or not a demo movie display is being executed (step 004SGS501). Whether or not a demo movie display is being executed is judged by whether or not a demo movie execution flag, which indicates that a demo movie display is being executed, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is not in progress, it is determined whether or not the menu is being displayed (step 004SGS502). Whether or not the menu is being displayed is determined by whether or not the menu display flag, which indicates that the menu is being displayed, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is not being displayed, it is determined whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS503). Whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on is determined by whether or not a touch ring on flag, which indicates that the touch ring 004SG035 is on, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is not on, it is determined whether or not the device is waiting to start a demo movie (step 004SGS504). Whether or not the device is waiting to start a demo movie is determined by whether or not a demo movie start waiting flag, which indicates that the device is waiting to start a demo movie, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is not waiting to start, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step 004SGS505). Whether or not a customer waiting demo designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not a customer waiting demo designation command reception flag, which indicates that a customer waiting demo designation command has been received, has been set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that a customer waiting demo designation command has been received, the demo movie start waiting timer for timing the time until the demo movie display starts is set to a timer value (60,000) equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (step 004SGS506), a demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), a guide display start waiting timer for timing the time until the guide display starts is set to a timer value (15,000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), a guide display start waiting flag indicating a wait for guide display start is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that the customer waiting demo designation command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received (step 004SGS507). Whether or not a power-on designation command has been received is determined by whether or not a power-on designation command reception flag, which indicates that a power-on designation command has been received, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on command has been received, the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (30,000) equivalent to approximately 60 seconds (step 004SGS508), a demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), the guide display start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15,000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), a guide display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that the power-on command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power outage recovery command has been received (step 004SGS509). Whether or not a power outage recovery command has been received is determined by whether or not a power outage recovery command reception flag, which indicates that a power outage recovery command has been received, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS509 that the power outage recovery command has not been received, the demo performance control process is terminated and the main performance control process is returned to. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS509 that the power outage recovery command has been received, the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (45000) equivalent to approximately 90 seconds (step 004SGS510), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), the information display start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), the information display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated and the main performance control process is returned to.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is waiting to start, it is determined whether or not the end condition E2 is satisfied, i.e., whether or not a start winning has occurred (step 004SGS514). Whether or not the end condition E2 is satisfied is determined by whether or not the start winning designation command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the start winning designation command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that termination condition E2 is satisfied, the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that the termination condition E2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E3 is satisfied, i.e., whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS515). Whether or not the termination condition E3 is satisfied is determined by whether or not the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 specified by the frame state display specification command has changed from off to on.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied, i.e., whether or not the menu display has started (step 004SGS517). Whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied is determined based on whether or not the control of the menu display has started in the previous menu display process in step 80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that termination condition E4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that the termination condition E4 is not satisfied, the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (step 004SGS523), and it is determined whether or not the device is waiting for the start of the guidance display (step 004SGS524). Whether or not the device is waiting for the start of the guidance display is determined by whether or not the guidance display start waiting flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the guidance display start waiting timer is waiting for the display to start, the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (step 004SGS525), and it is determined whether the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is 0, i.e., whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the guidance display start waiting timer started timing (step 004SGS526).

If it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is 0, the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS527), the guidance display is started (step 004SGS528), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the device is not waiting for the guidance display to start, or if it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is not 0, it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is 0, i.e., whether a specified time (60 seconds, 90 seconds, or 120 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer started timing (step 004SGS529).

If it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is not 0, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the performance control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is 0, the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS530), the demo movie running flag is set (step 004SGS531), a timer value (27500) equivalent to approximately 55 seconds is set as the demo movie timer value for timing the time until the demo movie display ends (step 004SGS532), the demo movie display is started (step 004SGS533), the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is in progress, it is determined whether any of the end conditions E2 to E4 has been met, i.e., whether a start winning has occurred, the touch ring 004SG035 has been turned on, or the menu display has started (step 004SGS534).

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that none of the termination conditions E2 to E4 are met, the timer value of the demo movie timer is decremented by 1 (step 004SGS535), and it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, i.e., whether 55 seconds have passed since the demo movie timer started timing (step 004SGS536).

If it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is not 0, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, the demo movie running flag is cleared (step 004SGS537), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS538), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS539), a guide display is started (step 004SGS540), the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 has been met, the demo movie running flag is cleared (step 004SGS541), the timer value of the demo movie timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS542), the demo movie display is terminated (step 004SGS543), and it is determined whether or not the termination condition E3 has been met, i.e., whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS544).

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether the termination condition E4 is satisfied, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS545).

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 is not satisfied, i.e., if termination condition E2 is satisfied, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is being displayed, it is determined whether or not end condition 2 is met, i.e., whether or not a start winning has occurred (step 004SGS546).

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is met, i.e., the menu display has ended due to the start winning, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS547), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether the menu display has ended (step 004SGS548). Whether the menu display has ended is determined based on whether the control of the menu display has ended in the previous menu display process in step S80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has not ended, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has ended, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS549), the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (60,000) equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), the guide display start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15,000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), the guide display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that touch ring 004SG035 is on, it is determined whether or not end condition 2 is met, i.e., whether or not a start winning has occurred (step 004SGS550).

If it is determined in step 004SGS550 that end condition 2 is met, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the performance control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS550 that end condition 2 is not met, it is determined whether end condition 4 is met, i.e., whether menu display has started (step 004SGS551).

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is off (step 004SGS552). Whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is off is determined based on whether or not the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 has changed from on to off in response to the frame state display specification command.

If it is determined in step 004SGS552 that the touch ring 004SG035 is off, the touch ring on flag is cleared (step 004SGS553), the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (60,000) equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), the guide display start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15,000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), the guide display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

(Type of performance mode)
Next, the types of presentation modes will be described with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, and (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A1), the decorative patterns (for low base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display section 004SG051 consisting of a circular number base section when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section, a character display section 004SG052 displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display section 004SG051, an information display section 004SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base section when viewed from the front and information about the character (for example, in this embodiment, the name of the character) displayed on the front of the information base section, and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG054 displayed so as to surround the periphery of the number display section 004SG051, the character display section 004SG052, and the information display section 004SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 004SG053 shows the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various information other than the name (such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052.

Also, as shown in Figures 21 (B1) and (C1), the decorative patterns (for high base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the high base state are composed of a number display section 004SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9", and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG064 displayed surrounding the number display section 004SG061. The decorative patterns for the high base state do not have a character display section and information display section like the decorative patterns for the low base state.

In addition, the display area 5S provided in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern. The small pattern consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but it is not necessary that all the numbers of both patterns correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern may be numbers "1" to "5", which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" of the decorative pattern, or may be symbols or figures different from the numbers of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 21, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute any one of the following presentation modes: the first presentation mode (see FIG. 21 (A1) (A2)), the second presentation mode (see FIG. 21 (B1) (B2)), and the third presentation mode (see FIG. 21 (C1) (C2)). The first presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. The second presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and the third presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A1), in the first presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a first background display 004SG081 depicting a daytime cityscape is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative pattern is framed in from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward, then moves linearly downward, and is framed out from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward. Also, when the leading decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) that is framed in passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative pattern (e.g., the "4" decorative pattern) is framed in and moves downward. In other words, when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of numbers "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and then repeatedly updating and displaying "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing a scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

The display area 5S located in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and the small symbol, while the special pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display the first pending display 004SG101 and the second pending display 004SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display that is being executed. Note that the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, the small symbol, the special pending memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common to all performance modes, so their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in FIG. 21 (B1), in the second presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background display 004SG082 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotating display that rotates around an axis of rotation that faces in the vertical direction.

For example, the decorative pattern in the second presentation mode has a first surface and a second surface that is the opposite surface of the first surface, and the preceding decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of "3") is displayed on the first surface. On the other hand, when the first surface faces forward, it is not possible to determine whether the succeeding decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of "4") is displayed on the second surface. In other words, because the base display unit 004SG064 has low transmittance (is opaque), the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative pattern).

The decorative patterns can also be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from the first side, to the second side, to the first side, to the second side, etc., the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative patterns.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a time-saving remaining display 004SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 21 (C1), in the third presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background display 004SG083 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 21 (C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative pattern is framed in from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward, then moves linearly downward, and is framed out from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward. Also, when the leading decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) that is framed in passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative pattern (e.g., the "4" decorative pattern) is framed in and moves downward. In other words, when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., before returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

The decorative patterns and small patterns also have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which the decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed, one decorative pattern is framed-in from the top edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a predetermined period is required for it to be framed-out from the bottom edge. In other words, a predetermined period is required for one decorative pattern to be displayed and for the decorative pattern display to cease. Meanwhile, during the predetermined period, the small patterns are displayed by switching (updating) the small patterns of losing combinations multiple times (e.g., five times).

In addition, in the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the first and third presentation modes, and in the rotating display in the second presentation mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts, and changes from high to low when the variable display stops; in other words, the variable display speed is variable, whereas the small patterns are variably displayed at a constant speed from when the variable display starts until it stops.

In this embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 is exemplified as being capable of executing the first, second, and third presentation modes as presentation modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of presentation modes may be executable. In particular, multiple types of presentation modes may be executable in response to one game state (for example, a low probability, low base state).

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to Figs. 22 to 25. Fig. 22 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first presentation mode. Fig. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 22. Fig. 24 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third presentation mode. Fig. 25 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first presentation mode and (B) the second and third presentation modes.

In the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams using lines other than solid lines (e.g., dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without symbols do not indicate images displayed on the display screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in first presentation mode)
First, an example of the operation of each section when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs. 22 and 23.

Figure 22 (A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the first performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. Also, the active display area 5F displays an active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 004SG101 (first reserved memory number "2").

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, while the decorative symbol change start action starts in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 004SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 22(D)). In addition, the first hold display 004SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 004SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 22(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 22(D)).

The erase effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 22(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 22(E), when the shift display of the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moving to the active display area 5F ends, the action of the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (the character's inversion movement) ends and an upward action begins, and when the upward movement ends, a downward movement begins and a scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 22(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(F), the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (character flipping action) ends and an upward action begins, and when the upward movement ends, as shown in FIG. 22(G), a downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(G), the action of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (the character's flipping action) ends and an upward action begins, and when the upward movement ends, as shown in FIG. 22(H), a downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts and the variable display of the small pattern starts, the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R, and middle decorative pattern display area starts, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first reserved display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, scrolling display begins after the first pending display 004SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display ends) and is displayed as active display 004SG103, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on the pending display has begun. Also, from when the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative pattern does not scroll, but a variable start action is performed in which the character flips, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun. Note that the operating mode of the variable start action can be changed in various ways.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speeds, a fade-out display is executed with a transmittance of approximately 90%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is slow immediately after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 22(F) and (G), and then moves through the medium speed shown in Figure 22(H) to the high speed shown in Figures 23(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so at high speeds, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Also, as shown in Figures 22(G) to 23(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, then speed up through medium speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency increases with acceleration.

(Example of variable display operation in the third presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the third presentation mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 24 (A) shows the state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolled in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the third performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 004SG101 (first reserved memory number "2"). In addition, the small symbols and the right hit notification image 004SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See Figure 24 (A))

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, but since it is in a high base state, the decorative symbol change start action (see FIG. 24(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 004SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 24(C)). In addition, the first hold display 004SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 004SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 24(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 24(D)).

The erase effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 24(B) continues to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins (see FIG. 24(D)). In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R starts all at once, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scroll display begins after the first pending display 004SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on the pending display has begun.

In addition, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speeds a fade-out display is executed with a transmittance of nearly 90%. For example, as shown in Figures 24(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, as shown in Figure 24(G), and then move to the medium speed shown in Figure 24(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually see each decorative pattern at high speeds.

In the present embodiment, the transparency of the decorative pattern is set to a first value (0%) when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, and when the variable display starts, the transparency gradually increases, and finally becomes a second value (90%) in the high-speed scroll display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In detail, the first value is the minimum value of the transparency, and may be a value at which the decorative pattern is clearly visible. For example, if the decorative pattern is most clearly displayed when the transparency is 5% in the settings, the first value may be set to 5% instead of 0%. The second value is the maximum value of the transparency, and may be a value at which the decorative pattern is almost difficult to see. For example, if the decorative pattern is almost invisible when the transparency is 100% in the settings, the second value may be set to 100% instead of 90%. In other words, the first value and the second value can be changed in various ways.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in response to the start of variable display, it performs an action to start varying the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the shift display ends, which switches the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pending memory display area 5U to active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display, and a variable start action is performed to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is being performed, making it possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the shift display. Also, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is being performed in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute a variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and can perform a common shift display when a variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command). This allows a common shift display to be performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, thereby reducing the number of shift display patterns.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low base state, when the effect control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display with the start of the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 performs a decorative pattern change start action, and does not start the scroll display of the decorative pattern until the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched to and displayed as active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 does not perform a decorative pattern change start action when the pending shift display is being performed with the start of the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 may perform a decorative pattern change start action when the effect control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and may not start the scroll display of the decorative pattern until the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched to and displayed as active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display, and a variable start action is performed to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is being performed, making it possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the shift display. Also, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is being performed in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state.

Even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and a common shift display can be performed when a variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command). This allows a common shift display to be performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, thereby reducing the number of shift display patterns.

In addition, in this embodiment, the scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center is started after the shift display that switches the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the special pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in any one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R among the left, right, and center is started after the shift display that switches the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the special pattern, the scroll display of any of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be started while the shift display is being performed.

(Operation of each part when variable display starts)
As shown in Fig. 25 (A), in the first performance mode, when the reserved memory number is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are displayed variably at high speed with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the scroll display is started after the variable start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. In addition, the reserved display is shifted, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started.

The decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scrolling to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed as the decorative patterns are faded out. This fade-out display period A21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in that order. Also, during the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small patterns are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative patterns ends and they are stopped and displayed. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed and the next variable display can start.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(B), in the second and third presentation modes, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-3 is executed, as the variable display of the special pattern starts, the small patterns are displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all start rotating or scrolling at the same time without any action to start the variation. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts.

The decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scrolling to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed as the decorative patterns are faded out. This fade-out display period A23 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually decelerate all at once and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing the patterns to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed statically. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action like those in the first and second presentation modes are not executed, and the variable display ends as is, and the decorative symbols are displayed statically together with the small symbols. After that, a symbol determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed, and the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when a scroll display is performed in the first presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when a rotating display is performed in the second presentation mode or a scroll display is performed in the third presentation mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21. See Figures 25 (A) and (B)).

In the first presentation mode, the appearance shown in FIG. 25(A) will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. In the second and third presentation modes, the appearance shown in FIG. 25(B) will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

(Example of SP reach performance)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP reach performance will be described based on Fig. 26 and Fig. 27. Fig. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach performance in a low base state. Fig. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach performance in a high base state. Note that Fig. 27 describes an example of the operation of the reach performance in the third performance mode, but the same reach performance may be executed in the second performance mode, or a different reach performance may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 26(A), when a variable display based on a super reach variation pattern is started in a low base state, the CPU 120 for controlling the display judges whether or not to execute a step-up display in which multiple characters appear step by step, and whether or not to display a specific step-up display pattern (see FIG. 26(B)) in which the background display becomes a rainbow form that notifies a confirmed jackpot at a specific step in the step-up display, based on the result of the variable display. Then, when it is decided to execute the step-up display and to display the specific step-up display pattern, the step-up display is started when a specific time has elapsed since the variable display was started, and the specific step-up display pattern is displayed at the specific step (see FIG. 26(B)). Note that if it is decided not to execute the step-up display, or if it is decided to execute the step-up display but not to display the specific step-up display pattern, a step-up display pattern that does not include a rainbow background is displayed.

Next, after a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode and the reach performance begins (see FIG. 26 (C)). At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed at high speed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach performance is displayed to notify the reach title, and the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as a notification performance to notify whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 26(D)). In the SP reach performance, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is an image different from the first background display 004SG081, which is the normal background display, and which shows space corresponding to the SP reach performance (see FIG. 26(E)(F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with a different mode depending on the type of SP reach performance.

Next, the game starts by displaying an operation prompt display 004SG071, consisting of the text "PRESS!!" that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, and a button display 004SG072 that resembles the push button 31B, for a period of time from when the battle is concluded until the specified operation valid period has elapsed (see FIG. 26 (G)).

When operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 004SG071 and button display 004SG072 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a specified light color while the movable body 32 descends from the origin position to the performance position, the effect display 004SG073 that highlights the movable body 32 is displayed, a specified performance sound effect is output, and the game is informed that it has been controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 26 (H)).

Next, a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background display, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed (see FIG. 26(I)). With the end of the SP reach performance, the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, and when the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed, and then the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 26(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32 does not descend from the origin position to the performance position, and after a result notification display 004SG078 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character (see FIG. 26(K)), a combination of confirmed symbols that is not a jackpot combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the notification performance when a fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background display (see FIG. 26(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(M), when the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, and while the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm the loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed, after which the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed temporarily, and the loss display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 26(M)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(A), when a variable display based on a super reach fluctuation pattern is started in a high base state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges, based on the variable display result, whether or not to display a specific cut-in performance display pattern (see FIG. 27(D)) in which a specific character appears and the background display becomes a rainbow pattern to notify that a jackpot has been confirmed, and stores the judgment result.

After the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode and the reach performance begins (see FIG. 27 (B)). At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed at high speed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach effect is displayed to notify the reach title, and the SP reach effect (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as an indication effect to notify whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot (see FIG. 27(C)).

Here, if it is decided to display a specific cut-in performance display pattern at the start of the variable display, the reach title display 004SG070 is displayed, and then the cut-in performance starts with the specific cut-in performance display pattern (see FIG. 27 (D)). Note that if it is decided not to execute the cut-in performance, or if it is decided to execute the cut-in performance but not to display the specific cut-in performance display pattern, a cut-in display with a background color other than rainbow is displayed.

In the SP reach performance, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is an image different from the first background display 004SG081, which is the normal background display, and which depicts space corresponding to the SP reach performance (see FIG. 27 (E) (F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with a different appearance depending on the type of SP reach performance.

The flow of Figures 27(G)-(M) is almost the same as Figures 26(G)-(M), except that in Figures 27(J)-(M) the third background display 004SG083 for high base is used, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a specific step-up performance with a rainbow background in a low base state as a specific performance to notify a confirmed jackpot (see FIG. 26(B)), and can execute a specific cut-in performance including a cut-in with a rainbow background in a high base state (see FIG. 27(D)). Although the specific step-up performance and the specific cut-in performance have the same rainbow background, their display modes are different, but the lighting modes of the board lamps and side lamps at this time are the same. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lighting of the board lamps and side lamps based on a common brightness data table (common table), so the data capacity for lighting can be reduced.

(Customer waiting demo performance [demo movie display])
Next, the customer waiting demo performance will be explained based on Fig. 28 to Fig. 34. Fig. 28 shows (A) the start and end conditions for the demo movie display, and (B) the configuration of the demo movie display. Fig. 29 shows an example of the operation of each part during the demo movie display. Fig. 30 is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demo performance. Fig. 31 shows an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Fig. 32 shows an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Fig. 33 shows (A) the first scene (company name), (B) the fourth scene (attention 1), and (C) the fourth scene (attention 2) display examples. Fig. 34 is a diagram comparing the display mode of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (attention 1, 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small pattern.

The "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect that the effect control CPU 120 uses to notify the user that the machine is in a waiting state where no game (e.g. variable display, big win game, small win game, etc.) is being played, i.e., the machine is waiting for customers, and is mainly performed by displaying a demo movie display (see Figures 31 and 32) on the image display device 5.

The demo movie display is a display that is different from the background display during play, and is intended to inform the player that the machine is vacant and not being used by the player. It is made up of a company name scene that informs the player of which company the gaming machine is related to, a machine introduction scene that explains the story of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the characters that appear, the production and specifications, a machine introduction scene that explains the title and subtitle of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a warning scene that informs the player of the precautions to take while playing before playing. In addition to the above content, the demo movie display may also introduce the production or explain the machine specifications in the machine introduction scene, and the content can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figures 28(A) to 30, the "customer waiting demo performance" (hereinafter also referred to as demo movie display or demonstration display) is started based on the performance control CPU 120 determining that any of the following start conditions S1 to S6 has been met. In detail, start condition S1 is met when a first time (e.g., 120 seconds) has passed since a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 has been received following the end of variable display, start condition S2 is met when a second time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since a power-on designation command output from the main board 11 has been received following power-on with initialization, and start condition S3 is met when a third time (e.g., 90 seconds) has passed since a power outage recovery designation command output from the main board 11 has been received following power-on without initialization. Start condition S4 is met when a fourth time (e.g., 120 seconds) has passed since the touch sensor (touch ring 004SG035) was turned off, start condition S5 is met when a fifth time (e.g., 120 seconds) has passed since the menu screen display ended, and start condition S6 is met when a sixth time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the demo movie display that went through conditions S1 to S5 ended (from the second week onwards, the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the customer waiting demo performance ends, just like condition S6).

The "demo movie display" ends when the performance control CPU 120 determines that any one of the following end conditions E1 to E4 has been met. In detail, end condition E1 is met when an end time (e.g., 55 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display started, end condition E2 is met when a start winning occurs, end condition E3 is met when touch ring 004SG035 is detected as being on, and end condition E4 is met when an operation to start displaying the menu screen is performed.

In addition, when the demo movie display is not being executed but the first to sixth hours are being timed in the waiting state for the above start conditions to be met (demo movie start waiting period), if the above end conditions E2 to E4 are met, the timekeeping is stopped, and thereafter, if the above start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are met, the timekeeping is reset (reset).

In addition, during the waiting period for the demo movie to start, the demo movie display is not displayed, but the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed on various background displays as guide displays regarding performance adjustments (see Figure 37 (A4) and Figure 123).

In addition, the guidance display regarding the adjustment of the effect may include, for example, a menu guidance display 004SG401 that provides guidance on operating the push button 31B to display a menu screen that allows adjustment of the effect functions, such as customizing and resetting the customization of various effect functions, such as the vibration function, V flash function, auto button function, and effect mode, provided on the push button 31B, and a volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 that provides guidance on button operations for adjusting the volume and light intensity, as well as guidance displays for adjusting the effect functions other than those mentioned above.

In addition, if end condition E3 is met, end condition E2 is almost never met. In other words, because the ball-hitting handle 30 must be operated in order for a starting win to occur, end condition E3 is generally met before end condition E2. However, in the following irregular cases, there is a possibility that end condition E2 will be met without end condition E3 being met.

Irregular case 1: The player calls a store attendant based on the occurrence of a grape (so-called a ball stuck between the nails), but the demo movie display starts before the store attendant arrives. If the grape is then released and an initial winning occurs, the demo movie display ends without the ball-hitting operation handle 30 being operated, so that the end condition E3 is not met and the end condition E2 is met.

Irregular case 2: If the on state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed by the performance control CPU 120 due to some malfunction in the CPU 103 or the performance control CPU 120, a start winning may occur without being able to confirm the on state of the touch sensor, so that the end condition E2 is met without the end condition E3 being met.

Note that the end condition E3, which is satisfied when the touch sensor is in the on state, does not have to be set as the end condition. In such a case, the demo movie display will not end due to the handle operation alone, and the end condition E2 will be satisfied when the start winning occurs, and the demo movie display will end.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the demo movie display is made up of four scenes, Scene 1 to Scene 4. In more detail, Scene 1 is the "Company Name" part (Company Name Part) that displays the names and slogans of companies involved in the development, manufacturing, sales, etc. of the company in question (see FIG. 31(A)(B)).

The second scene is made up of the "machine introduction 1" to "machine introduction 3" parts (machine introduction 1 to 3 parts) in which the story of the performance performed by the pachinko game machine is introduced. In the "machine introduction 1" part (machine introduction 1 part), the friendly characters and their names appearing in the performance are displayed (see FIG. 31 (C) to (F)). In the "machine introduction 2-1" part (machine introduction 2-1 part), a confrontation scene between friendly characters and enemy characters and narration text are displayed (see FIG. 31 (G) and (H)). In the "machine introduction 2-2" part (machine introduction 2-2 part), a confrontation scene between friendly characters and enemy characters and narration text are displayed (see FIG. 31 (J) and (K)). In the "machine introduction 2-3" part (machine introduction 2-3 part), a confrontation scene between friendly characters and enemy characters and narration text are displayed (see FIG. 32 (M) to (O)). In the "Model Introduction 3-1" part (Model Introduction 3-1 part), a cut-in display of an ally character is displayed without text between the "Model Introduction 2-1" part (Model Introduction 2-1 part) and the "Model Introduction 2-2" part (Model Introduction 2-2 part) (see Figure 32 (I)), and in the "Model Introduction 3-2" part (Model Introduction 3-2 part), a cut-in display of an ally character is displayed without text between the "Model Introduction 2-2" (Model Introduction 2-2 part) and the "Model Introduction 2-3" part (Model Introduction 2-3 part) (see Figure 32 (L)).

The third scene is composed of a "Machine Name Main Title Name" part (main title part) in which the main title name of the pachinko machine is displayed, and a "Machine Subtitle Name" part (subtitle parts 1 and 2) (see Figures 32 (P) to (V)). In the "Machine Main Title Name" part (main title part), the main title name "FEVER POWER" is displayed, and in the "Machine Subtitle Name" part, the subtitle name "II/All Together Ver." is displayed.

The "machine main title name" is the main theme of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and expresses the theme of the machine in one word, while the "machine subtitle name" is the subtitle of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be supplementary information added to the machine main title name (for example, "II" indicating that this is the second work of this title, or the heading "All Together Ver."), and the content can be changed in various ways.

The fourth scene is made up of a "warning 1" part (warning 1 part) and a "warning 2" part (warning 2 part), in which the player is warned (see Figure 32 (W) to (X)). In the "warning 1" part (warning 1 part), a warning message is displayed to prevent the player from becoming addicted to playing the game, and in the "warning 2" part (warning 2 part), a warning message is displayed to prevent physical accidents caused by the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 29, after the start condition is satisfied, various demo images are displayed in the order of the first scene, the second scene, the third scene, and the fourth scene. The display period tb2a of the first scene is about 10 seconds (tb2a=10 seconds), the display period tb2b of the second scene is about 30 seconds (tb2b=30 seconds), the display period tb2c of the third scene is about 10 seconds (tb2c=10 seconds), and the display period tb2d of the fourth scene is about 10 seconds (tb2d=5 seconds), and the display period tb of one demo movie display is about 55 seconds (tb2=55 seconds). Then, as shown in FIG. 30, if the first demo movie display ends without the end conditions E2 to E4 being satisfied during the display of the demo movie display, that is, if the first demo movie display started by the satisfaction of any of the start conditions S1 to S5 ends by the end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) will be entered. After that, when 30 seconds, which is the sixth time, have elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is deemed to be met and the demo movie display starts again. After that, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display end conditions E2 to E4 end.

While the demo movie display is being displayed on the image display device 5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, and the display of the number of reserved memories and small symbols is maintained (see Figures 31 and 32). Note that, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the number of reserved memories and small symbols are displayed while the demo movie display is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories and small symbols may be hidden while the demo movie is being displayed.

In addition, while the demo movie display is being displayed on the image display device 5, the performance control CPU 120 controls the illumination of the board lamps (attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f) and frame lamps (main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b) based on a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo), while controlling the illumination of the button lamp 9e based on a white lighting (default) brightness data table (lamp data table described later: button white lighting) that does not correspond to the demo movie display. Also, although background music is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R, music for the demo movie display may be output.

The brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (the lamp data table: customer waiting demo described later) is made up of multiple brightness data tables (grandchild tables described later).

In more detail, the brightness data table for the main lamp 9a (grandchild table described later) that constitutes the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo described later) includes a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period from model introduction part 1 to model introduction part 2-3, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the main title part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 2, and a brightness data table corresponding to the period from warning part 1 to warning part 2, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table for each period.

The brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) for the side lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the decorative lamp 9f (grandchild tables described later) includes a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 2-1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 3-1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 2-2 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 3-2 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 2-3 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the main title part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the subtitle part 1, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the subtitle part 2, and a brightness data table corresponding to the periods of the warning 1 part to the warning 2 part. The light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table for each period.

The control using the brightness data table during the period when the demo movie is displayed will be described in detail later.

(Example of demo movie display)
Next, an example of the operation of the demo movie display will be described with reference to Figs. 31, 32, and 119 to 121. In Fig. 119, (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing an example of the character display and light emission mode in each scene. Fig. 120 shows an example of the operation of the first scene (A), the third scene (B), and the fourth scene (C). Fig. 121 is a comparison table showing the character animation display.

An example of an expression showing a display mode used in the following description will be described.
A "fade-out display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image increases over time, whereas a "fade-in display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image decreases over time.

An "animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (moving image display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame before, and visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transparency of the displayed image different from that of the image one frame before. In other words, an "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement, such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarged display", "reduced display", "frame-in display", and "frame-out display", but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display", in which the display mode, such as color tone, changes. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of animation display, and refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) in which the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous image, and the display mode does not change at all.

In addition, an example of an expression used in the following description to indicate a light emission mode will be described.
"Wave lighting" is a lighting pattern that sequentially changes the brightness of the brightness data, and has less change in brightness between each data than the following flash, for example, the brightness of the lamp increases at a predetermined cycle, the color changes at a predetermined cycle, or a predetermined color is emitted to move within the lighting area. It is also used when the effect element is not sufficient to simply keep the lamp lit, or when it is desired to emphasize the image display device 5 rather than the lamp, as in the following flash, so that the lamp does not stand out too much.

"Flash" is a lighting pattern that alternates between high brightness data and low brightness data (including off). By varying the intensity of the light, it is possible to greatly change the brightness perceived by the player, and this lighting pattern is used for emphasis.

"Rainbow" is a pattern commonly used when the display in FIG. 26(B) is executed in a low base state, and when the performance in FIG. 27(D) is executed in a high base state. In this embodiment, a rainbow wave pattern is used in which the seven colors are lit in waves by sequentially changing the brightness data, but a rainbow flash pattern may also be used by alternating low brightness data (including off) between the brightness data while sequentially changing the brightness data of the seven colors.

As shown in Fig. 31 (A) and (B), when the start conditions for the demo movie display are met, the display of the first scene starts. Note that, as described later, depending on the start conditions, a switching display may be displayed before the display of the first scene starts. In the first scene, a company name background display 004SG301 consisting of white characters is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302 consisting mainly of a blue company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B is displayed in a "small" size at the center of the screen, and then faded in while gradually expanding and decreasing the transmittance (transparency), so that the company name display 004SG302 appears to be moving from the back side of the display screen to the front side. Note that the number of reserved memories and small patterns are displayed and maintained in the display area 5S at the upper left of the display screen. In this way, even if the decorative pattern is not displayed, the small pattern is displayed, so that the player can recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

In addition, in the first scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) change their light emission state (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302. For example, the brightness of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may increase or the color may change as the transmittance of the company name display 004SG302 decreases.

To explain in more detail using Figure 120(A), first, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed in "small" size at the center of the screen, and then fades in over a period of about three seconds while gradually expanding and decreasing in transmittance (transparency) (see Figure 120(A1)). When it is displayed at the specified position, a bound display is displayed in which the company name display 004SG302 collides with a wall, bounces off, and is then displayed at the specified position (see Figure 120(A2)). Then, after being statically displayed at the specified position in the center of the screen for about four seconds (see Figure 120(A3)), it is faded out over one second (see Figure 120(A4)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (A1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash white when the company name display 004SG302 is displayed, and then light up in white. In this way, the white flash at the start of the demo movie display emphasizes that the display of the company name display 004SG302 is about to begin. Then, the brightness increases in conjunction with the company name display 004SG302 expanding and fading in (white fade-in lighting), flashes white in conjunction with the bound display of the company name display 004SG302, then lights up in white, and the brightness decreases in conjunction with the fade-out display (white fade-out lighting).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 1" part of the second scene begins to be displayed, the friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D that appear in various effects and the text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D showing the names of each character are faded in sequentially (animated display), while the effect display 004SG502 is displayed in the background (see Figures 31 (C)-(F)). Note that, as shown in Figure 119 (A2), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in the color corresponding to each character as each character appears and their names fade in, and then light up white.

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-1" part of the second scene begins to be displayed, an animation of the enemy character 004SG510A that appears in various effects is displayed, and a fade-in (animated) text display 004SG511A reads "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" (see Figures 31 (G) and (H)). Next, when the "Model Introduction 3-1" part begins to be displayed, a background display 004SG503 showing the city and an ally character 004SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in display is displayed showing the ally character flying through the city to rush to the scene (see Figure 31 (I)).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-2" part of the second scene starts to be displayed again, the ally character 004SG500A, enemy character 004SG510A, and text display 004SG511B saying "Protect the town from the enemy!" are faded in (animated) (see Figures 31 (J) and (K)). After that, when the "Model Introduction 3-2" display starts, the ally character 004SG500A is enlarged and a cut-in display is displayed with the effect display 004SG504 in the background (see Figure 31 (L)).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-3" part of the second scene starts to be displayed again, an image of friendly character 004SG500A and enemy character 004SG510A fighting and text display 004SG511C saying "Don't lose!" are faded in (animated) (see Figures 32 (M) to (N)). After that, all friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and text display 004SG511D saying "Everyone unite!" are faded in (animated) (see Figure 32 (O)).

Note that the animation display of the friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A in the second scene involves the friendly characters expanding and contracting and fighting, while the various text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D and 004SG511A-004SG511D are animated with less change in visibility than the animation displays involving movement such as the friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D, for example by fading in at the start of the display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (A2), in the second scene, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash green when "Model Introduction 3-1" and "Model Introduction 3-2" are displayed, but they are basically lit in a white wave pattern, and the lighting state (e.g., lighting, blinking, turning off, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or never) changes in conjunction with the animation display (fade-in display) of the various text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D, 004SG511A-004SG511D. Basically, the lighting state (e.g., lighting, blinking, turning off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes in conjunction with the dynamic animation display of friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A running, jumping, punching, etc.

Specifically, for example, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may light up, flash, or change color in accordance with movements such as running, jumping, and punching of friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A.

In the second scene, the main lamp 9a is controlled to be turned off, but the light emission mode of the main lamp 9a may be changed in the same way as the other panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Next, when the display of the third scene begins, an effect display 004SG505 is displayed in the background, and a model main title name display 004SG520A consisting of the words "FEVER POWER" and a cloud-shaped background is displayed in "small" size in the center of the display screen (prescribed display position), and then fades in (animated) while gradually enlarging and decreasing its transmittance (transparency), giving the appearance that the model main title name display 004SG520A is moving from the back of the display screen to the front (see Figures 32 (P) to (R)).

Next, the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, consisting of the letters "II," is displayed in "extra large" size to the right of the model main title name display 004SG520A (standard display position), then fades in while shrinking slightly and decreasing its transmittance (transparency), and finally bounds in "large" size to the right of "FEVER POWER" (standard display position) (see Figures 32 (S) to (T)).

In addition, the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, which consists of the characters "Everyone Assemble Ver.", is displayed in "extra large" size in the center (default display position) in front of the model main title name display 004SG520A, and then it shrinks slightly and moves to the bottom of "FEVER POWER" (default display position) where it is displayed in "large" size (see Figures 32 (U) to (V)).

In addition, in the third scene, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are basically lit in a rainbow wave pattern, and the lighting state changes in conjunction with the animated display of the model subtitle name displays 004SG520C, 004SG520C. In particular, in the "Model Subtitle Name" part, when the model subtitle name displays 004SG520C, 004SG520C move and bound to the specified display position, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash.

Using Fig. 120(B), the display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C consisting of the characters "Everyone Gathers Ver." will be explained in detail. After being displayed in "extra large" size in the center (prescribed display position) in front of the model main title name display 004SG520A (see Fig. 120(B1)), it moves slightly shrinking over about 0.5 seconds to the lower side of "FEVER POWER" (prescribed display position) and bounds in "large" size (see Fig. 120(B2)), and is statically displayed at the prescribed display position for 0.5 seconds (see Fig. 120(B3)). After that, the entire model title name display 004SG520 consisting of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C is gradually enlarged (animated) over about 1.5 seconds (see Fig. 120(B4)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (A3), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in rainbow (rainbow wave) when model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed, and when model subtitle name display 004SG520B and model subtitle name display 004SG520C are displayed, they flash white in conjunction with the zoom in/out (animation) display and then light up in rainbow (rainbow wave) lights.

Next, when the "Caution 1" part of the fourth scene starts to be displayed, a dark green caution background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the anti-addiction display 004SG312 is faded in (animated) in the center of the screen (see FIG. 32 (W)). Next, when the "Caution 2" part starts to be displayed, the display switches to a black caution background display 004SG321, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed (see FIG. 32 (X)).

Using Figure 120 (C), the display of the "Warning 1" part will be explained in more detail. When the display of the "Warning 1" part of the fourth scene begins, a dark green warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and an anti-addiction display 004SG312 is displayed in the center of the screen at the specified display position, fading in (animated) for 0.5 seconds (see Figures 120 (C1) and (C2)). Next, after the transparency of the anti-addiction display 004SG312 becomes 0% (see Figure 120 (C3)), it is displayed still for 2 seconds (see Figure 120 (C4)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (A4), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not flash white in conjunction with the fade-in display of the anti-adventure display 004SG312 in the "Warning 1" and "Warning 2" parts, but continue to light up in white waves in the fourth scene.

In addition, in the fourth scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not change their light emission state (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the addiction prevention display 004SG312, so the addiction prevention display 004SG312 is prevented from being displayed more emphasized than the company name display 004SG302, the model main title name display 004SG520A, and the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C.

(Comparison of display modes for each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 28B, the display modes of the image display device 5 in the various scenes during the demo movie display will be compared with reference to FIGS.

<Display mode when text display begins> In the first scene (company name), the second scene (model introduction 1, 2), the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and the fourth scene (warning 1), various text is faded in (animated), whereas in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (warning 2), various text is not faded in (animated).

<Text animation (degree of change in visibility)> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), an animation is displayed with a "large" degree of change in visibility, in the second scene (model introduction 1, 2) an animation is displayed with a "medium" degree of change in visibility, in the second scene (model introduction 3) and fourth scene (warning 1) an animation is displayed with a "small" degree of change in visibility, while in the second scene (model introduction 3) and fourth scene (warning 2), no animation is displayed for the text.

<Text size> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (main title name of the model), the text is displayed in "small" size and then enlarged to "large", while in the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the text is displayed at a fixed "small" or "medium" size from the start. Also, in the second scene (model introductions 1 and 2), the text is displayed in "medium" size, while in the third scene (subtitle name of the model), the subtitle text is displayed in "extra large" size and then reduced to "large".

<Background color> In the first scene (company name), the background color is white, in the second scene (model introductions 1-3) the color corresponds to the story, in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) the color corresponds to the title, and in the fourth scene (warning 1), the warning 1 part is dark blue and the warning 2 part is black.

For example, when displaying text, the text will be emphasized more when it is animated than when it is not animated, the text will be emphasized more when there is a large change in visibility in the animation than when there is a small change in visibility, and the text will be emphasized more when there are many text colors than when there are few text colors.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the animation display of the company name display 004SG302, which is made up of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B displayed in the first scene (company name), is displayed in such a way that the text fades in and then bounds and expands in size, whereas the animation display of the anti-addiction display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1) fades in, but the size remains "medium", so that the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 is more emphasized than the animation display of the anti-addiction display 004SG312, i.e., the degree of change in the visibility of the text display is greater.

In addition, the animated display of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) is a display in which the text display fades in to a specified display position and then expands, contracts or moves, whereas the animated display of the anti-addiction display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1) is a display in which the text display simply fades in to a specified display position and does not change thereafter by expanding, contracting or moving, so that the animated display of the company name display 004SG302 is more emphasized than the animated display of the anti-addiction display 004SG312, i.e., the degree of change in the visibility of the text display is greater.

Here, based on Figures 120 and 121, we will compare the animated text displays in the first scene (company name), the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and the fourth scene (warning 1).

As shown in Fig. 121, in the first scene (company name), the company name display 004SG302 is displayed with a fade-in while expanding at the start of display (see Fig. 120 (A1)), is displayed with a bounding display when the specified position is displayed (see Fig. 120 (A2)), and is displayed as still after the specified position is displayed (see Fig. 120 (A3)). In the third scene (model main title name), the model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed with a fade-in while expanding at the start of display, is displayed as still when the specified position is displayed (see Figs. 32 (P) to (R)), and is displayed as expanded after the specified position is displayed (see Fig. 120 (B4)). In the third scene (model subtitle name), the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C is enlarged at the start of display and then reduced (see Figs. 120(B1) and (B2)), is still displayed when the specified position is displayed (see Fig. 120(B3)), and is enlarged after the specified position is displayed (see Fig. 120(B4)). In the fourth scene (warning 1), the addiction prevention display 004SG312 is faded in at the start of display (see Figs. 120(C1) and (C2)), and is still displayed when and after the specified position is displayed (see Figs. 120(C3) and (C4)).

In other words, the degree of emphasis in the display is as follows: company name >= model title (main, sub) > warning. The warning is only a fade-in display when the display starts, and there is no animation when the specified position is displayed or after the specified position is displayed, so the degree of emphasis is low. On the other hand, the company name is emphasized more than the warning because it uses animation display in two places, when the display starts and when the specified position is displayed, and the model title name (main, sub) is emphasized more than the warning because it uses animation display in two places, when the display starts and after the specified position is displayed.

In this way, the demo movie display has multiple scenes that convey information through text display, but since it is desired to emphasize information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, each can be emphasized by displaying them with a dedicated display animation. Among these, by emphasizing the animation display of the company name and model title display scene compared to the warning 1 scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the text display of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C is faded in to the specified display position, and then an animation display is performed in which the size is enlarged, reduced, or moved, whereas in the fourth scene (warning 1), the addiction prevention display 004SG312 is faded in to the specified display position, and then it is displayed without an animation display in which the size is enlarged, reduced, or moved.

In this way, by adding a lingering movement to the display of the machine title name, customers are drawn to the title, and by not adding a lingering movement to the display of the attention, the characters can be read clearly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Comparison of company names and warning notices)
Here, based on Figures 33 and 34, the display modes of the number of reserved memories and small patterns in the first scene (company name) and the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) are compared.

As shown in FIG. 33(A), in the first scene (company name), a company name background display 004SG301 is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302 consisting of a company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B is displayed in the center of the screen. The number of reserved memories and small patterns are displayed in the display area 5S located in the upper left of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 33(B), in the fourth scene (warning 1), a warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and an animation of an addiction prevention display 004SG312 is displayed in the center of the screen. The addiction prevention display 004SG312 is composed of a heading display 004SG313 consisting of the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation," and a horizontally long rectangular heading frame display 004SG314 that forms the background of the heading display 004SG313.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG321 is displayed and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed. The accident prevention display 004SG322 is composed of a first accident prevention display 004SG322A and a second accident prevention display 004SG322B.

The first accident prevention display 004SG322A is composed of an illustration display 004SG323A showing a situation where a player hits his head on the protruding part at the top of the gaming machine frame 3, a heading display 004SG324A consisting of the characters "Watch your head", a warning detail display 004SG325A consisting of the characters "The top protrudes. Be careful not to hit your head", a warning mark 004SG326A consisting of an "!" displayed within a triangular mark, and an attention mark display 004SG327A consisting of an "x" mark.

The second accident prevention display 004SG322B is composed of an illustration display 004SG323B showing a situation in which the player's fingers are caught in the gap between the stick controller 31A and the cabinet, a heading display 004SG324B consisting of the text "Watch out for pinched fingers", a warning detail display 004SG325B consisting of the text "The stick will move. Take care not to get your hands or fingers caught", a warning mark 004SG326B consisting of an "!" displayed within a triangular mark, and an attention mark display 004SG327B consisting of a "↓" mark.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the first scene (company name), the characters in the company slogan display 004SG302A are medium size and chromatic (blue) in color, the characters in the company logo display 004SG302B are large size and chromatic (blue) in color, and the company name background display 004SG301 is achromatic (white) in color.

In the fourth scene (warning 1), the text of the heading display 004SG313 is medium size and achromatic (white), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the warning background display 004SG311 is chromatic (light blue). In addition, the border of the heading frame display 004SG314 is achromatic (black).

The background of the text displayed in the heading display 004SG313 includes not only the warning background display 004SG311, which covers the entire display screen, but also the heading frame display 004SG314, which is provided in part of the display screen.

In the fourth scene (warning 2), the illustration display 004SG323A is "large" in size and achromatic (white) in color, the text of the heading display 004SG324A is "medium" in size and achromatic (white) in color, the text of the warning detail display 004SG325A is "small" in size and achromatic (white) in color, the warning mark 004SG326A is "medium" in size and chromatic (yellow) in color, the attention mark display 004SG327A is "small" in size and chromatic (red) in color, and the warning background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black) in color.

The "Caution Marks 004SG326A, 004SG326B" are marks that help make the heading text that draws the player's attention more noticeable, and the "Attention Mark Display 004SG327A, 004SG327B" are marks that help the illustration that shows the area the player should pay attention to. Unlike text, these are displayed as a single mark, so it is preferable that they are a chromatic color so that they stand out more than the achromatic heading text display.

The reserved memory number and small pattern are "small" in size and achromatic (black) in color.

As shown in Figures 33(A) and 34, when comparing the display mode of the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name) with the number of reserved memories and small patterns, the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B have a larger character size, use a greater number of display colors, and have higher saturation and brightness that make up the color tone than the number of reserved memories and small patterns, so the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more emphasized than the number of reserved memories and small patterns.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved memories and the small pattern are shown in an achromatic color (black), but they may be in a chromatic color. Even in this case, the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more emphasized than the number of reserved memories and the small pattern as long as they satisfy at least one of the following: a larger character size, a greater number of display colors, and higher saturation/brightness than the number of reserved memories and the small pattern.

Next, as shown in Figures 33 (B), (C) and 34, comparing the addiction prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) with the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG311 is a chromatic color (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 that forms the background of the heading display 004SG313 is a chromatic color (dark blue), while the warning background display 004SG321 is an achromatic color (black).

In this way, by using different background display colors for the text display of the warnings in Warning Part 1 and Warning Part 2, which are different, it is possible to increase the attention paid to different issues, such as preventing addiction and preventing physical accidents, when switching from Warning Part 1 to Warning Part 2, thereby resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Next, comparing the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name) with the addiction prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), the company name background display 004SG301 in the company name display 004SG302 is achromatic (white), while the caution background display 004SG311 in the addiction prevention display 004SG312 is chromatic (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the caution background display 004SG321 in the accident prevention display 004SG322 is achromatic (black).

In this way, the background display color of the text display is different between the first scene (company name) and the fourth scene (warning 1, warning 2), which is different. By using different background colors for the company name display and the warnings, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when they switch, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, in this embodiment, the background display color of the text display of the company name background display 004SG301, the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 are all different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the background display color of the text display of at least one of the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 is different from the background display color of the text display of the company name background display 004SG301.

(Comparison of lighting patterns in each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 28B, the light emission state of the lamp in each scene during the demo movie display will be compared with reference to FIG. 31 and FIG.

<Linkage with animated text display> In the first scene (company name), third scene (main title name of model, subtitle name of model), and fourth scene (warning 1), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in conjunction with the animated text display (fade-in display), whereas in the second scene (model introductions 1 and 2), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in conjunction with the animated character display, not in conjunction with the animated text display (fade-in display) (non-linked).

<Degree of emphasis> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (main model title name, subtitle model name), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated with a "high" degree of emphasis. In the second scene (model introductions 1-3), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated with a "medium" degree of emphasis. In the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated with a "low" degree of emphasis.

"Degree of emphasis" refers to the degree of emphasis in the light emission mode of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). For example, a flash (blinking), i.e., when the interval between color changes in the luminance data is short, will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a wave-like lighting, where the interval between color changes in the luminance data is long; a large number of lit lamps will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a small number of lit lamps; a large number of lit colors will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a small number of lit colors; a large proportion of chromatic colors will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a small proportion of chromatic colors; a rainbow-lit lamp will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a non-rainbow-lit lamp; and a high luminance lamp will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a low luminance lamp.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 119 and based on FIG. 28(B), the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with the text animation display, so the degree of emphasis is "high," the second scene (model introductions 1-3) has a green flash but is not linked to the text animation display, so the degree of emphasis is "medium," the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with the text animation display, so the degree of emphasis is "high," and the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) is not linked to the text animation display, so the degree of emphasis is "low."

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the lamp is higher when the lighting mode shows the company name than when it is warning, and also higher when the lighting mode shows the title name than when it is warning. And because there are more lamp changes linked to animation displays for company names than for model titles, the lighting mode for company names is higher in emphasis than the lighting mode for model titles. Therefore, the relationship of lamp emphasis is company name > model title (main, sub) > warning.

In addition, since multiple panel lamps and frame lamps are provided at multiple locations, when comparing the degree of emphasis between the light emitted by a first lamp consisting of multiple lamps and the light emitted by a second lamp consisting of multiple lamps, it is sufficient to compare the light emission mode when the entire first lamp is averaged with the light emission mode when the entire second lamp is averaged, rather than comparing the degree of emphasis between one first lamp and one second lamp.

<Rainbow> In the "Model Subtitle Name" part (e.g., FIG. 32 (P)-(V)) of the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the board lamp and frame lamp are illuminated in rainbow mode. The brightness data table (grandchild table described later) used at this time is the same as the rainbow brightness data table used in the step-up effect (see FIG. 26 (B)) and cut-in effect (see FIG. 27 (D)) described above (common table (XD___L-_RAINBOW_01) described later).

<Specific lighting> Only in certain frames (e.g., Fig. 32 (S) and (U)) of the model subtitle name in the third scene (title name), the board lamp and frame lamp are illuminated with a white flash (specific mode). The brightness data table (grandchild table described later) used at this time is a brightness data table for subtitle 1 and a brightness data table for subtitle 2, which are different from the brightness data table for the main title used in the model main title name, and a white flash (specific mode) is illuminated in conjunction with the animated character display of the character display.

As shown in FIG. 28B, in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introductions 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 29) different from the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is used, and in the second scene (model introduction 2-2), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introductions 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 29) common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is used in the first scene (company name). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (the grandchild table corresponding to the model introductions 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) includes brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), and does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

In this way, the demo movie display has several scenes where information is conveyed by displaying text, but since we want to convey the company name in particular, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, we can emphasize it in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

As shown in FIG. 28B, in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 29) is used, which is different from the brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to main title part), the brightness data table for subtitle 1, and the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts). In the second scene (model introduction 2-2), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 29) that is common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to main title part), the brightness data table for subtitle 1, and the brightness data table for subtitle 2 are used. The table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) includes brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and the brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3) does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), or the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

In this way, the demo movie display has several scenes where information is conveyed by text display, but since we want to convey the model name in particular, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, we can emphasize it in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The state of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) (see FIG. 29) is more emphasized (highlighted) than the state of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to attention 1 and attention 2 parts) (see FIG. 29), and the state of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the subtitle 1 brightness data table, and the subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) (see FIG. 29) is more emphasized (highlighted) than the state of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to attention 1 and attention 2 parts).

Specifically, the first scene (company name) has a scene where a white flash is used in conjunction with the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "high," the third scene (main title name of the model, subtitle name of the model) has a scene where a white flash is used in conjunction with the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "high," whereas the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) has a "low" emphasis level because it is not linked to the animated text display.

In this way, the demo movie display has multiple scenes that convey information through text display, but since it is desired to emphasize information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, each can be emphasized by emitting a dedicated light. In particular, by emphasizing the lighting conditions of the company name and model title display scenes compared to warning scenes, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) are more emphasized than the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to attention 1 and attention 2 parts) and the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the subtitle 1 brightness data table, and the subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) in the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to attention 1 and attention 2 parts) in any of the following modes: (1) a mode with many flashes, (2) a mode with many colors lit, (3) a large number of light-emitting means used, and (4) a mode with high brightness, thereby emphasizing the company name and machine title, and as a result, favorable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the appearance of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is emphasized more than the appearance of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the subtitle 1 brightness data table, and the subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the subtitle 1 and 2 parts), which makes it possible to emphasize the company name more and clearly appeal to players which company the gaming machine is related to, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) using the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, 2 parts) while the demo movie is being displayed, and controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) using the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the step-up performance and cut-in performance) when a step-up performance (see FIG. 26(B)) or a cut-in performance (see FIG. 27(D)) is being executed. The rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, 2 parts) used while the demo movie is being displayed and the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the step-up performance and cut-in performance) used when a step-up performance (see FIG. 26(B)) or a cut-in performance (see FIG. 27(D)) is being executed are a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more vibrant, and the brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow is shared with the brightness data table used in response to specific effects executed during play (e.g., step-up effects and cut-in effects), which does not increase capacity and results in optimal customer waiting control.

The rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) after the end of play in the low base state (normal state), the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) after the end of play in the high base state (special state), and the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the step-up effect and cut-in effect) used when a step-up effect (see FIG. 26(B)) (specific effect) that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) and a cut-in effect (see FIG. 27(D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) are executed are a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more vibrant, and by sharing the brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow with the brightness data table used for the specific effects that can be executed in the normal state and the special effects that can be executed in the special state, there is no need to increase capacity, and as a result, it is possible to perform optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the step-up effect (see FIG. 26(B)) (specific effect) that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) and the cut-in effect (see FIG. 27(D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) are effects that definitively notify that control will be entered into a jackpot gaming state, and the brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)) used for effects that definitively indicate that control will be entered into a jackpot gaming state is also used for the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The brightness data table for subtitle 1 and the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) are brightness data tables that use multiple brightness data to illuminate the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in a lighting mode that is linked to the animation display of the model/subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C.

In this way, the main title name is displayed first, followed by the subtitle name, and the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed. Therefore, by illuminating the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) in conjunction with the display animation of the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in FIG. 29, the multiple luminance data constituting the company name luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) are luminance data configured so that the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means), the panel lamp, and the side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means) emit light, and the multiple luminance data constituting the introduction luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1, model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, model introduction 3-1, 3-2 parts) are luminance data configured so that the side lamp 9b and the panel lamp emit light and the main lamp 9a does not emit light.

In this way, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by displaying text. In the company name display scene, both the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means) are illuminated, and in the model introduction scene, the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means) are illuminated, but the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) is not illuminated. This makes it possible to relatively emphasize the first scene in which the company name is displayed, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

In the present embodiment, the first light-emitting means is a panel lamp and a side lamp 9b, and the second light-emitting means is a main lamp 9a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the frame lamps may be used as the second light-emitting means that does not emit light in the second scene, and at least one of the panel lamps may be used as the first light-emitting means.

Also, as a variant, the performance control CPU 120 may control the first light-emitting means (e.g., the panel lamp) in the model introduction part of the second scene using the brightness data table for introduction 1 corresponding to the model introduction 1 part (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part), control the first light-emitting means (e.g., the panel lamp) in the model introduction 2 part using the brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts), and control the second light-emitting means (e.g., the frame lamp) in the model introduction 1 part and the model introduction 2 part using one brightness data table (one grandchild table).

In this way, while the demo movie is being displayed, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by displaying text, and in the company name display scene, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means emit light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, and in the model introduction part 1 and model introduction part 2, the first light-emitting means emits light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, but the second light-emitting means emits light in a common light-emitting mode, so that the company name display scene can be relatively emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may control the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in the model introduction 1 part of the second scene using a model introduction 1 luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part) that is different from the company luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part), the model main title luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the model subtitle luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the subtitle 1 and 2 parts), the warning 1 luminance data table, and the warning 2 luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the warning 1 and 2 parts) and control the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in the model introduction 2 part of the second scene using the one luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part).

As mentioned above, there are multiple situations where information is conveyed by text displays, but since it is desirable to emphasize information such as company names, model titles, and warnings, each can be highlighted by emitting a dedicated light to highlight them in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the execution period of the model introduction scene including model introduction part 1 and model introduction part 2 (30 sec) > execution period of the company name display scene (10 sec), and the execution period of the model introduction scene including model introduction part 1 and model introduction part 2 (30 sec) > execution period of the warning display scene (5 sec), and the company name text display and warning text display may be displayed at display timings other than when the demo movie is being displayed. In this way, by making it possible to highlight the model introduction scene and title name display scene, which are only displayed when the demo movie is being displayed, for a longer period, it is possible to achieve optimal customer waiting control.

It is also possible to display the company name text and warning text even when the demo movie is not being displayed. For example, the company name text and warning text may be displayed during the ending period after the big win round has ended, or the same display as that displayed during the demo movie may be displayed. In this case, the display time may be set shorter than during the demo movie in order to maintain the tempo of the big win and high base state.

(Light emission pattern of lamps corresponding to game status)
Next, the light emission modes of the lamps corresponding to the game states will be explained with reference to Fig. 35 and Fig. 36. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing the light emission modes of the lamps corresponding to the game states. Fig. 36 (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement positions of the lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A).

As shown in FIG. 35, the panel lamp and frame lamp arranged on the pachinko gaming machine 1 are designed to emit light in different ways depending on the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, when an initialization notification is made following a cold start, when it is controlled to a low base state, when it is controlled to a high base state, when a demo movie display is being shown, and when an error notification, which will be described later, is being made.

Specifically, during the execution period of the initialization notification, the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e flash in "red."

In the low base state, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) is used, the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b are lit in a wave pattern with blue as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white.

In the low probability high base state (time-saving state), the time-saving background brightness data table (lamp data table: background time-saving) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with "green" as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white." In addition, in the high probability high base state (probability change state), the probability change background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with "purple" as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white." In the following, these time-saving background brightness data table and probability change background brightness data table are sometimes collectively referred to as the high base background brightness data table (or high B background brightness data table).

When the demo performance (demo movie display) is in progress, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b change their light emission patterns with "white" as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white."

When the error notification is in progress, the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a color corresponding to the state (low base state, high base state, demo performance), while the main lamp 9a flashes in red and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

The "primary color" refers to the color that forms the basis of the overall color scheme in each period, and may be, for example, the color that has the highest light emission time and occupies the highest light emission area (number of lamps) in each period, and may be a color other than the colors listed above. Also, a given hue may include multiple colors that differ in brightness, lightness, saturation, etc., and if the primary color is "blue," it may be a color similar to "blue."

For example, similar colors will be explained with reference to Figure 122. Colors have three attributes: hue (color tone), value (brightness, brightness), and saturation (vividness). "Similar colors" include: 1. combinations of colors that are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors) and have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness, value (brightness), and saturation (vividness)), 2. combinations of the same hue but different tones, and 3. combinations of colors that differ only in value or saturation.

To explain an example of "1. Combinations of adjacent colors (adjacent colors) with the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness, luminance) and saturation (vividness))" above with reference to Figures 122 (A) and (B), if the three primary colors of light, red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F], are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a given number (24 colors in this case), each of the three colors will be dissimilar to one another. Colors with a hue difference within an angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on this hue wheel are "similar colors," and combinations are not limited to adjacent colors that are adjacent to each other on the hue wheel.

For example, if red (R) is the base color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side and 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side (total 60 degrees) are similar to red (R), if green (G) is the base color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees to the reddish purple (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (total 60 degrees) are similar to green (G), and if blue (B) is the base color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side and 30 degrees to the reddish purple (M) side (total 60 degrees) are similar to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, combinations of colors that have a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel can be considered "similar colors".

Furthermore, it is preferable that similar colors include combinations of colors that are included in warm colors, such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that give a warm feeling, and cool colors, such as blue and purple, which are chromatic colors that give a cold feeling, as well as combinations of colors that are included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors that are intermediate between warm and cool colors, such as green and purple.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), the board lamps include an attacca lamp 9c built into the special variable winning ball device 7 located at the bottom right of the game board 2, a movable body lamp 9d built into the movable body 32 located at the top of the image display device 5, and a decorative lamp 9f built into the decorative body located on the left side of the image display device 5. Note that lamps provided on the game board 2 may include lamps other than those mentioned above (for example, lamps built into the winning device, etc.).

The frame lamps include a main lamp 9a provided on the top of the gaming machine frame 3, side lamps 9b provided on the left and right, and a button lamp 9e provided on the push button 31B. Note that the lamps provided on the gaming machine frame 3 may include lamps other than those mentioned above (for example, lamps built into the ball-hitting control handle 30 and speakers 8L and 8R).

The panel lamp, the attacca lamp 9c, is made up of multiple LEDs, the movable body lamp 9d is made up of multiple LEDs, the decorative lamp 9f is made up of multiple LEDs, the main lamp 9a is made up of multiple LEDs, the side lamp 9b is made up of multiple LEDs, and the button lamp 9e is made up of multiple LEDs.

Figure 36(B) is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the various lamps shown in Figure 36(A), and in the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, the schematic diagram shown in Figure 36(B) may be used.

(Start of waiting demo performance. Stop fluctuation version.)
Next, the flow from when the variable display is stopped to when the customer waiting demo performance starts will be described based on Figs. 37 to 42 and 123. Fig. 37, (A1) to (A8), is a diagram showing an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance is interposed after the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state ends. Fig. 38, (A4) to (A5), is a diagram showing the main part of Fig. 37. Fig. 39 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in the low base state. Fig. 40 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in the low base state. Fig. 41, (B1) to (B8), is a diagram showing an example of operation of the customer waiting demo performance in the high base state. Fig. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in the high base state. Fig. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in the high base state. Fig. 44 is a diagram showing an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance starts after the pachinko game machine is started by cold start (power-on with initialization). FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the flow of starting a customer waiting demo performance after a pachinko game machine is started by a cold start. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko game machine is started by a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing the flow of starting a customer waiting demo performance after a pachinko game machine is started by a hot start in a low base state. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko game machine is started by a hot start in a high base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. FIG. 49 is a timing chart showing the flow of starting a customer waiting demo performance after a pachinko game machine is started by a hot start in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo presentation is started when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 37 to 40.

As shown in Figures 37 and 39, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts in a low base state, if a preview effect or reach effect has been determined to be executed, these effects are executed (see Figure 37 (A1)), although not shown in particular. During the variable display, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are not displayed.

The board lamp and frame lamp start to light up in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e continues to light up in white based on the default brightness data table. Also, normal background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. When a preview or reach performance is executed, a brightness data table for the preview or reach performance (lamp data table corresponding to the preview or reach performance) is set, and light emission control and BGM output are performed in a manner appropriate to the performance.

Next, when the variable display ends and the losing combination of confirmed symbols (for example, "326") is displayed statically (see FIG. 37 (A2)), the CPU 103 sends a customer waiting demo designation command, and the performance control CPU 120 starts timing (120 seconds) the demo movie start waiting timer, entering the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Note that the output of the background music is stopped, but it may be set to fade out when a predetermined time has passed since the end of the variable display.

When 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started timing and the demo end conditions have not been met, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A3)), and when it moves to the right to a specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A4)).

After another 90 seconds have passed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S1 has been met, and the customer waiting demo performance starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) starts (see Figures 37 (A5) to (A8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and control of the light emission mode based on white is started based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

When starting the demo movie display in this way, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the losing confirmed patterns (decorative patterns) displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4), during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen displays a combination of winning confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) frozen against the background of the first background display 004SG081. Also, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, before switching from the first background display 004SG081 to the demo movie display, a fade-out display of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the determined losing symbols (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the determined losing symbols (decorative symbols) gradually increases, the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) is switched to the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) switch from a blue wave illumination to a white-based illumination mode (see Figures 38 (A41) and (A42)). Then, after the transparency of the first background display 004SG081 and the losing combination of confirmed patterns (decorative patterns) approaches 100% and the display screen whites out (see FIG. 38 (A42)), the demo movie display begins (see FIG. 38 (A5)).

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (the variable display stops display), and displays the demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends. Then, before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, it switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

Therefore, by using a gradual design in which the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the demo movie display starts, it is possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting everything at once, and to make the customer aware of the start of the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the demo movie display. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 that receives the extended command: BF01 starts the light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display. On the other hand, after sending the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 switches the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39, when a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied, the fade-out display (switching display) of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the display screen is whited out and then the display of the company name display 004SG302 is started. In other words, when the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while starting the switching control of the display content from the normal background display to the demo movie display including the fade-out display (switching display) of the normal background display, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied.

Therefore, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, and in particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see FIG. 37 (A5)) of the demo movie display starts after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed, so that the light emission control for the customer waiting demo of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) starts before the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, the lighting control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first without switching the display using the fade-out display as described above, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable (see Figures 38 (A31), (A32), and 39).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf for delaying the start of the demo movie display is set to about 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be changed in various ways. Also, although a fade display is performed as the switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be performed, or the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern may be maintained without performing a fade display or the like.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39, if 55 seconds have passed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo end condition being satisfied, the first demo movie display ends based on the determination that the demo performance end condition E1 has been satisfied. Then, the display screen displays the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the determined symbols that have not been selected (decorative symbols), as well as the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see FIG. 37 (A4)). Also, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table, and light emission control is performed based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e is controlled to emit light based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends due to the satisfaction of the demo performance end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated from the second time onwards until any of the demo performance end conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied. Note that from the second time onwards, the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), and together with the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern, animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is started, and the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see FIG. 123).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same animation display as the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 for the first time (see FIG. 37 (A3)).

In addition, when changing from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), as explained in FIG. 38, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

The performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (the variable display stops), displays a demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends, and controls the light emission of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) using a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) during the first customer waiting period, and controls the light emission of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) using a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period, while controlling the light emission of the button lamp 9e using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light) that is different from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the first customer waiting period and the second customer waiting period.

In this way, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a constant state, this can be prevented, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

In more detail, as described above, when using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit or blinked in conjunction with the display mode of the demo movie display. For example, if button lamp 9e is lit when an operation promotion display is displayed in a performance introduction scene that encourages the player to operate push button 31B, the player may misunderstand and perform an unnecessary operation, so button lamp 9e is set to a fixed mode.

Also, as shown in Figure 40, when the variable display of the second special pattern is started due to an irregular win or the like in a low base state, the flow from the variable display ending to the demo movie display starting is the same as when the variable display of the first special pattern is started in a low base state as shown in Figure 39, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
Next, an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo presentation when the gaming state is in a high base state will be described with reference to Figs.

As shown in Figures 41 and 42, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the high base state, if a preview effect or reach effect has been decided to be executed, these effects are executed (not shown) (see Figure 41 (B1)). During the variable display, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are not displayed.

The board lamp and frame lamp start to light up in purple (or green) waves based on the brightness data table for the high B background for the probability change (or time saving) (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time saving)), and the button lamp 9e continues to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lights up in white). Also, BGM for the high B background is output from speakers 8L and 8R. When a preview or reach performance is executed, a brightness data table for the preview or reach performance (lamp data table corresponding to the preview or reach performance) is set, and light emission control and BGM output are performed in a manner appropriate to the performance.

Next, when the variable display ends and the losing combination of confirmed symbols (for example, "326") is displayed statically (see FIG. 41 (B2)), the CPU 103 sends a customer waiting demo designation command, and the performance control CPU 120 starts timing (120 seconds) the demo movie start waiting timer, entering the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Note that the output of the background music is stopped, but it may be set to fade out when a predetermined time has passed since the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started timing and the demo end conditions have not been met, the menu guide display 004SG401 will be framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B3)), and when it moves to the right side to a specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B4)).

After another 90 seconds have passed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started without the demo end condition being met, the demo performance start condition S1 is determined to have been met, and the customer waiting demo performance starts, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) starts (see Figure 41 (B5) to (B8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and control of the light emission mode based on white is started based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

When starting the demo movie display in this way, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed win (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of winning confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In more detail, during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen displays a combination of winning symbols (decorative symbols) frozen on the background of the third background display 004SG083. Also, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are wavy lit in purple (or green) based on the high B background brightness data table for the probability change (or time reduction) (lamp data table: background time reduction, or lamp data table: background probability change).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is satisfied, before switching from the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) to the demo movie display, a fade-out display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of the determined symbols that have lost (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG084) and the combination of the determined symbols that have lost (decorative symbols) gradually increases, the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) is switched to the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched from a purple or green wave lighting to a white-based light emission mode (see Figures 38 (A41) and (A42)). Then, the transparency of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of the losing confirmed patterns (decorative patterns) approaches 100% and the display screen goes white, after which the demo movie display begins (see Figure 41 (B5)).

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state ends (the variable display stops display), and displays the demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends. Then, before switching the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, it switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts the light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Therefore, by using a gradual design in which the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the demo movie display starts, it is possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting everything at once, and to make the customer aware of the start of the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the demo movie display. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 that receives the extended command: BF01 starts the light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display. On the other hand, after sending the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 switches the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 41, when a predetermined period of time tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 begins fading out (switching display) the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, and after the display screen goes white, begins displaying the company name display 004SG302. In other words, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), while starting switching control to switch the display content from the high base background display to a demo movie display including a fade-out display (switching display) of the high base background display, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo start condition S1 was met.

Therefore, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, and in particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see FIG. 41 (B5)) of the demo movie display starts after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed, so that the light emission control for the customer waiting demo of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) starts before the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, the lighting control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first without switching the display using the fade-out display as described above, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable (see Figures 38 (A31), (A32), and 42).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf is set to about 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be changed in various ways. Also, although a fade display is performed as the switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be performed, or the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern may be maintained without performing a fade display or the like.

Also, as shown in Figure 42, if 55 seconds have passed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo end condition being satisfied, the first demo movie display ends based on the determination that the demo performance end condition E1 has been satisfied. Then, the display screen displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of the winning confirmed symbols (decorative symbols), as well as the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see Figure 37 (A4)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and light emission control is performed based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e is controlled to light emission based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends due to the establishment of the demo performance end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated from the second time onwards until any of the demo performance end conditions E2 to E4 is established. Note that from the second time onwards, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), and the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is started along with the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, and the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see FIG. 123).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same animation display as the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 for the first time (see FIG. 41 (B3)).

In addition, when changing from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state has ended (the variable display has stopped display), displays a demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period has ended, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period, and displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state has ended (the variable display has stopped display). During this period, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used to control the illumination of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), while during the first and second customer waiting periods, the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background guaranteed to change (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) and a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light) different from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) are used to control the illumination of the button lamp 9e.

In this way, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a constant state, this can be prevented, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

In addition, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a constant state in both the low base state and the high base state, it is possible to prevent confusion in both the low base state and the high base state, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, during the first customer waiting period, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a brightness data table for the high-speed B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and during the first scene (e.g., first scene (company name) etc.) during the second customer waiting period, controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a company brightness data table corresponding to the first scene (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part), and during the second scene (e.g., second scene (machine introductions 1 to 3) etc.) during the second customer waiting period, controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a company brightness data table corresponding to the first scene (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part). The panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are controlled using a grandchild table corresponding to parts 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2, and in the first scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) that is different from the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 (grandchild tables corresponding to model introductions 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2), and in the second scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

In this way, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he is being prompted to operate the push button 31B, so by keeping the state constant, it is possible to prevent this mistake, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.

The default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) is a different brightness data table from the promotion effect brightness data table (lamp data table: button flashing white, lamp data table: button flashing red) used when a promotion effect (see FIG. 26(G)) that encourages the operation of the push button 31B is executed, and the brightness data constituting the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) has less change in brightness than the brightness data constituting the promotion effect brightness data table (lamp data table: button flashing white, lamp data table: button flashing red).

By doing this, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) is composed of brightness data that makes the push button 31B less emphasized than when it is being prompted to operate, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, and as a result, it is possible to perform optimal customer waiting control.

The default brightness data table may also be configured with brightness data for turning off the button lamp 9e. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that he is being prompted to operate the push button 31B, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B is provided on the gaming machine frame 3, but is not managed by the same brightness data table as the other main lamps 9a and side lamps 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Instead, it is managed separately, which allows for an optimal design to be implemented to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39, in the low base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 37 (A2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Also, as shown in FIG. 42, in the high base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see FIG. 41 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while displaying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, by not displaying a guide immediately after the variable display ends, it is possible to prevent the player from being prompted to make unnecessary adjustments to the presentation, and since there is a possibility that the player may have left their seat once the demo movie display has ended, by prompting the player to make adjustments to the presentation immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in FIG. 43, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started due to an irregular win or the like in a high base state, the flow from the variable display ending to the start of the demo movie display is the same as when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in a high base state as shown in FIG. 42, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, in a low base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends due to an irregular win or the like, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 37 (A2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Also, as shown in Figure 43, in the high base state, after the variable display of the first special pattern has ended due to an irregular winning or the like, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 41 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) starts to be displayed, while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, after the variable display of the first special pattern has ended in either the low base state or the high base state, or even after the variable display of the second special pattern has ended, by not displaying the guide display immediately after the variable display has ended, it is possible to prevent the player from being prompted to make unnecessary adjustments to the presentation, and since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat once the demo movie display has ended, by prompting the player to make adjustments to the presentation immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

<Cold start>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a cold start (power-on with initialization) and then starts a customer waiting demo performance will be described with reference to Figs. 44 and 45.

As shown in FIG. 44 (C1) and FIG. 45, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 starts on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds have passed from the start timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command and the first game state background command from the CPU 103, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the initialization display 004SG610 starts instead of the start preparation display 004SG600 (see FIG. 44 (C2)), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as the initial operation control (not shown). In addition, the board lamp and the frame lamp start to flash red based on the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification), and the output of the initialization notification sound starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. Additionally, the demo movie start waiting timer starts timing (60 seconds), and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, when 10 seconds have passed since the power-on command and the first game state background command were received, the initialization process ends, the display of the initialization display 004SG610 ends, and the display of the first background display 004SG081 begins (see FIG. 44 (C3)). At this time, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are not displayed. In addition, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light). In addition, the output of background music from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped.

Next, if 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started without the demo end conditions being met, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 44 (C4)), and when it moves to the right to a specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 44 (C5)).

After another 30 seconds have passed, and 60 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started without the demo end condition being satisfied, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S2 has been satisfied, and the customer waiting demo performance starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) starts (see FIG. 44 (C6) to (C9)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission mode based on white starts based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table.

The subsequent flow is similar to that in the low base state shown in Figures 37 to 39, so detailed explanations of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (low base state)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started will be described with reference to Figures 46 to 47.

As shown in FIG. 46 (D1) and FIG. 47, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start in the low base state, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 starts on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds have passed from the start timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command and the first game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) start to light up in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), the button lamp 9e starts to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In addition, the demo movie start waiting timer starts timing (90 seconds), and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Then, two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power recovery designation command and the first game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the first background display 004SG081 begins (see FIG. 46 (D2)), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 and the like is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have passed since the start of the demo movie start waiting timer without the demo end condition being met, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 46 (D3)), and when it moves to the right side to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 46 (D4)).

If another 60 seconds pass, and 90 seconds pass after the demo movie start waiting timer starts without the demo end condition being satisfied, the demo performance start condition S3 is determined to be satisfied, and the customer waiting demo performance starts, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) starts (see FIG. 46 (D5) to (D8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and control of the light emission mode based on white starts based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

The subsequent flow is similar to that in the low base state shown in Figures 37 to 39, so a detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (high base state)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started will be described with reference to Figures 48 to 49.

As shown in Figures 48 (E1) and 49, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in a high base state, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 begins on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When three seconds have passed since the start timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command and the second and third game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) start to light up in purple (or green) waves based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), the button lamp 9e starts to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the output of background music from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In addition, the demo movie start waiting timer starts timing (90 seconds), and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Then, two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power recovery designation command and the second and third game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) begins (see FIG. 48 (E2)), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 and the like is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have passed since the start of the demo movie start waiting timer without the demo end condition being met, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 48 (E3)), and when it moves to the right side to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 48 (E4)).

If another 60 seconds pass, and 90 seconds pass without the demo end condition being satisfied after the demo movie start waiting timer starts, the demo performance start condition S3 is determined to be satisfied, and the customer waiting demo performance starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) starts (see FIG. 48 (E5) to (E8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) switch from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the control of the light emission mode based on white starts based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

The subsequent flow is similar to that in the high base state shown in Figures 41 to 43, so detailed explanations of each will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 47 and 49, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then a hot start is performed, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the display of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), but displays the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figures 46 (D2) and 48 (E2)), and then displays a demo movie display. After the demo movie display has ended, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) start to be displayed, while the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 45, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then a cold start is performed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed (see FIG. 44 (C3)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed, while displaying the first background display 004SG081.

In this way, the start-up situation before an amusement store opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization), and in either case, the amusement store staff can check the displays by checking the background display after powering on, checking the demo movie display, and checking the information display, improving the efficiency of the checks. Furthermore, when the background display is displayed when the amusement store opens and players are welcomed, the information display will be the background display, so that proper guidance can be given to adjustments to the presentation from the timing of the start of play, and a suitable gaming environment can be provided to players, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

In the present embodiment, after a hot start or cold start, the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed, followed by the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light guide display 004SG402, and then the demo movie display starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the demo movie display may start after the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed, without the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light guide display 004SG402 being displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 45 and 47, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a low base state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed (see Figures 44 (C3) and 46 (D2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed, while displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Also, as shown in FIG. 48, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 in the high base state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), but displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see FIG. 48 (D2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) starts to be displayed, while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, the start-up state before the gaming establishment opens can be either a low base state or a high base state, and in order to make it possible to check in the background which state the establishment was in, no information display is displayed to avoid getting in the way, and since it is highly likely that the state has already been confirmed if the background is subsequently displayed again, by displaying the information display from the timing at which the background display starts to be displayed, if the background display is displayed when the gaming establishment opens and players are welcomed, it will be the background display that displays the information display, so that proper guidance can be given to adjustments to the presentation from the timing of the start of play, and a suitable gaming environment can be provided to players, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, after the variable display is finished, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 are not displayed, and the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, and after a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 are displayed in a specific animation (fade-in display), thereby changing the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). ), then a demo movie display is displayed, and after the display period of the demo movie display has elapsed, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402 are displayed in a common animation display (frame-in display) with the animation display (frame-in display) of the first menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402, so as to be superimposed on the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, by not displaying the information immediately after the variable display has ended, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promptings for adjustments to the presentation, and once the demo movie display has ended, by prompting the user to adjust the presentation immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the user to play in a suitable gaming environment, and further, by displaying the information immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display using the same animation display as when the information display is displayed after the variable display has ended, it is possible to appeal to the user that the information display has been displayed without incurring any costs, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

In the present embodiment, a frame-in display is applied as an animation display of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement direction, movement speed, display position, etc. are not limited to those described above. In addition, the animation display may be other types of animation display such as a fade-in display, a moving display, or an enlarged display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 47, FIG. 49 and FIG. 123, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed after the variable display has ended in the low base state, displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed after the variable display has ended in the high base state, displays a demo movie display when 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed after the power outage recovery command has been received based on the pachinko game machine 1 having been started in a hot start in the low base state, and displays a demo movie display when 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed after the power outage recovery command has been received based on the pachinko game machine 1 having been started in a hot start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is a period longer than 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5).

In this way, if the demo movie display were to be displayed immediately after the variable display ends, it is possible that the player has not yet changed, which would be annoying, so a longer time of tc1 and tc2 (120 seconds) is set. On the other hand, after a hot start, since it is the gaming store staff, not the players, who are present, a shorter time of tc4 and tc5 (90 seconds) is set, so that the gaming store staff can immediately check the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 45 and FIG. 123, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have passed since the variable display ended in the low base state, displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have passed since the variable display ended in the high base state, displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started in a cold start in the low base state, and displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started in a cold start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is a period longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the variable display ends, there is a possibility that the player has not yet changed, which would be annoying, so a longer time, tc1 and tc2, = 120 seconds, is set, and since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first start method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement arcade, a shorter time, tc3, = 60 seconds, is set so that the demo movie display is displayed immediately, allowing the gaming arcade staff to immediately check the demo movie display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in Figures 45, 47, 49 and 123, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have passed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being started up with a hot start in a low base state, displays a demo movie display when 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have passed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being started up with a hot start in a high base state, displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since receiving a power-on command based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being started up with a cold start in a low base state, and displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since receiving a power-on command based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being started up with a cold start in a high base state. In this case, 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5) is a period longer than 60 seconds (second specific period tc3).

As such, since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement establishment, by having the demo movie display appear immediately, gaming establishment staff can immediately check the demo movie display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

39, 42 and 45, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed after the variable display has ended in the low base state, and displays the demo movie display again when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display has ended; in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed after the variable display has ended, and displays the demo movie display again when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display has ended; in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed after the variable display has ended, and displays the demo movie display again when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display has ended; A demo movie display is displayed when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 was started up by a cold start, and when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have passed since the demo movie display ended, the demo movie display is displayed again, and when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 was started up by a cold start in a high base state, the demo movie display is displayed again when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have passed since the demo movie display ended. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is a period longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the variable display ends, there is a possibility that the player has not changed and it would be annoying, so a longer time of 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is set, and since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first start method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement store, a shorter time of tc3 = 60 seconds is set so that the demo movie display is displayed immediately, allowing gaming store staff to immediately check the demo movie display and become more familiar with the introduced machine. Furthermore, in any of the situations where the variable display ends in a low base state, after the fluctuation in a high base state ends, and after a cold start, the demo movie display is displayed once, and the period until the demo movie display is displayed again is the same, so that the demo movie display can be displayed stably, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in Figures 47 and 49, after being started by a hot start, a start-up preparation display 004SG600 is displayed to indicate that the device is starting up (see Figures 46 (D1) and 48 (E1)), and at the timing associated with displaying the display indicating that the device is starting up, the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are controlled using a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and at the timing associated with displaying the start-up preparation display 004SG600, the button lamp 9e is controlled using one default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

In this way, by illuminating the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before the background display is displayed, it is possible to check whether the panel lamp and frame lamp are normal at the start-up stage, and then seamlessly switch to the illumination mode for when customers are waiting, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(End of waiting demo performance. Time lapse version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance ends over time will be described with reference to Fig. 50 to Fig. 52. Fig. 50 (A) to (E) are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. Fig. 51 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. Fig. 52 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends over time in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo presentation ends over time when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 50 and 51.

As shown in Figures 50 and 51, in the low base state, if the first demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 was satisfied, ends when the end condition E1 is satisfied, that is, 55 seconds have passed since the demo movie display started, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) will begin. After that, if 30 seconds, which is the sixth time, have passed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is deemed to have been satisfied and the demo movie display will begin again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) will be repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demo movie display end.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), when the second part of the warning message for the fourth and final scene of the demo movie is displayed, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

When the end condition E1 for the first demo movie display is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) start to light up in blue waves (see Figure 50 (B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 was met, the 2nd part of the 4th scene's accident prevention display 004SG322 gradually changes to black and merges with the black background display 004SG321 for caution, starting a fade-out display (switching display) (see FIG. 50(C)). Then, the display screen goes black and blacks out, and the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern start to be displayed, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 50(D)), and when it moves to the right side to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 50(E)).

In other words, when the end condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and starts illumination control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while starting switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background display including fade-out display (switching display), but the display of fade-out display (switching display) as the normal background starts after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 is met (see Figures 50 (C) and 51).

In more detail, when the termination condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify normal background display. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display to the performance control CPU 120, and upon receiving the extension command: B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending the extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to normal background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display starts after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, and in particular, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern starts after the predetermined period tg and the switch display period have elapsed, so that the light emission control for the normal background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) starts before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the normal background display is started. This gradual design prevents a bad feeling when the demo display ends, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a customer waiting demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period ends after the variable display in the low base state ends, controls using a normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) during the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period in the high base state ends, switches from the customer waiting demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background luminance data table before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG081, and switches from the customer waiting demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the first background display 004SG081.

In this way, the control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the background display starts. This gradual design prevents the end of the demo movie display from leaving a bad feeling. Furthermore, the state of the lamps can be quickly notified to the player, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the satisfaction of any one of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402 start to be displayed a predetermined time after the background display is switched to the demo movie display, whereas when the demo movie display is ended based on the satisfaction of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402 start to be displayed when the demo movie display is switched to the background display.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo presentation ends over time when the gaming state is in a high base state will be described with reference to Figures 50 and 52.

As shown in Figures 50 and 52, in the high base state, if the first demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 was satisfied, ends when the end condition E1 is satisfied, that is, 55 seconds have passed since the demo movie display started, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) will begin. After that, if 30 seconds, which is the sixth time, have passed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is deemed to have been satisfied and the demo movie display will begin again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) will be repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demo movie display end.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), when the second part of the warning message for the fourth and final scene of the demo movie is displayed, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

When the end condition E1 of the first demo movie display is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) start to light up in purple (or green) waves (see Figure 50 (B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 was met, the 4th scene's 2nd part accident prevention display 004SG322 gradually changes to black and merges with the black background display 004SG321 for caution, starting a fade-out display (switching display) (see FIG. 50(C)). Then, the display screen turns black and blacks out, and the 3rd background display 004SG083 (or 2nd background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern start to be displayed, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 50(D)), and when it moves to the right side to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 50(E)).

In other words, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts the illumination control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while starting the switching control of the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) including the fade-out display (switching display) and the decorative pattern background display, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the high B music background starts after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 is satisfied (see Figures 50 (C) and 52).

In detail, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the background display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the background display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 that receives the extension command: B11D (or B121) starts the light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the background display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. On the other hand, after the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display, it switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display starts after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, and in particular, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern starts after the predetermined period tg and the switch display period have elapsed, so that the light emission control of the high B music background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) starts before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to control the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the high B background display is started. This gradual design prevents the end of the demo display from leaving a bad feeling, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period following the end of the variable display in the high base state, and controls them using a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period in the high base state, and controls the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082). Before the display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time shortening)), and before the display is switched from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time shortening)).

In this way, the control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the background display starts. This gradual design prevents the end of the demo movie display from leaving a bad feeling. Furthermore, the state of the lamps can be quickly notified to the player, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the satisfaction of any one of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402 start to be displayed a predetermined time after the background display is switched to the demo movie display, whereas when the demo movie display is ended based on the satisfaction of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402 start to be displayed when the demo movie display is switched to the background display.

(End of waiting demo performance. Start winning version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance ends with a start winning will be described based on FIG. 53 to FIG. 58. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends with a start winning in a low base state, with (A) to (E). FIG. 54 is a diagram showing details of the display mode of FIG. 53, with (A) to (G). FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a low base state. FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a low base state. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a high base state. FIG. 58 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo presentation ends with the first start winning when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 53 to 55.

As shown in Figures 53 to 55, in the low base state, if the demo movie display that is started by the satisfaction of any of the start conditions S1 to S6 ends based on the satisfaction of the end condition E2, that is, the occurrence of the first start winning (the start of the variable display of the first special symbol) that occurs during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbol begins.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the first start winning occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins (see FIG. 53 (B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begins, and the variable display of the decorative pattern begins (see FIG. 53 (C) to (E)).

In other words, when the end condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and starts light emission control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while starting switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background (variable display) display and variable display of decorative patterns, but the normal background display and variable display of decorative patterns start at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) after the end condition E2 is met (see Figures 53 (C) and 55).

More specifically, when the termination condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. In response to this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative pattern to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 that receives the extension command: B10E starts the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Meanwhile, after transmitting the extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative pattern after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 54(A), when the first start winning occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene is being displayed in the demo movie display, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins, while the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of the small symbols begins until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was satisfied (see FIG. 54(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern begins, and the first reserved display 004SG101 is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U, followed by a shift display in which the first reserved display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F (see Figures 54 (C) and (D)).

As shown in Figures 54(C) to 54(E), the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C do not start scrolling and each character executes a change start action until the first reserved display 004SG101 displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F, that is, the shift display of the reserved display is completed, and the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C do not start scrolling, as shown in Figures 54(C) to 54(E). Change start actions include, for example, actions in which the character displayed in the character display section 004SG052 moves its face or body or changes its expression on the pedestal display section 004SG054 in a manner different from the scrolling display.

When the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start to scroll in the order of left, right, and center (see FIG. 52 (F)). When the scrolling display starts, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from low to medium to high speed, and the fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in the display speed, and at high speed the transmittance reaches approximately 90% (see FIG. 52 (G) and FIG. 55). Note that in the low base state (first performance mode), the appearance shown in FIG. 54 will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern starts.

As a result, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of the decorative patterns begin a predetermined period of time th after the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, so that the lighting control for the normal background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and switches to the scrolling display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative patterns.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the customer that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, so that the change in the light emission pattern is easily noticeable to the player, and the player can be notified immediately that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

As shown in FIG. 56, the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins due to an irregular win or the like in a low base state is the same as the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in a low base state as shown in FIG. 55, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with the second start winning when the gaming state is in a high base state will be explained based on Figure 57, with reference to Figures 53 and 124.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the high base state, if the demo movie display that is started by the satisfaction of any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 ends based on the satisfaction of the end condition E2, that is, the occurrence of a second start winning (the start of the variable display of the second special pattern) that occurs during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative pattern begins.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is displayed, if the second start winning occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the purple (or green) wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) begins (see FIG. 53 (B). In FIG. 53 (B), blue wave lighting is performed). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was satisfied, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern begins, and the variable display of the decorative pattern begins (see FIG. 53 (C) to (E)).

In other words, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts the illumination control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while starting the switching control of the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern start at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 is satisfied (see FIG. 53 (C)).

More specifically, when the termination condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the variable display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the variable display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern to the performance control CPU 120, and upon receiving the extension command: B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the high B background brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 124(A), when the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, if the second start winning occurs and the end condition E2 is established, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) start to light up in purple (or green) waves, while the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of small symbols starts until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was established (see FIG. 124(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern begins, and the second reserved display 004SG102 is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U, and then a shift display is started in which the second reserved display 004SG102 moves to the active display area 5F (see FIG. 124 (C)).

In addition, as shown in Figures 124 (C) to 124 (D), the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C do not start scrolling and remain temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the second reserved display 004SG102 displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F, that is, until the shift display of the reserved display is completed, but in the high base state, the change start action of each character is not executed (see Figure 25 (B)).

When the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start to scroll simultaneously on the left, right, and center (see Figure 124 (E)). When the scrolling display starts, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in the display speed, and at high speed the transmittance reaches approximately 90% (see Figures 124 (F) and (G)).

In addition, in the high base state (second presentation mode, third presentation mode), the appearance shown in FIG. 124 will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started.

As a result, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the scrolling display of the decorative patterns begin a predetermined period of time th after the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, so that the lighting control for the high B background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and switches to the scrolling display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative patterns.

In other words, when the first start condition is met while the demo movie display is being displayed in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, and when the second start condition is met while the demo movie display is being displayed in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state.

In this way, in the high base state, by switching control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, in the low base state and high base state, by switching control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify that the first or second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, so that the change in the light emission pattern is easily noticeable to the player, and the player can be notified immediately that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

As shown in FIG. 58, the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins due to an irregular win or the like in a high base state is the same as the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state as shown in FIG. 57, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) by switching them from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol when the first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, and controls them by switching them from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed variable (or lamp data table: background time shortened)) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol when the second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed.

In this way, regardless of which start winning event occurs, by switching the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the user that a start winning event has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a scrolling display of the decorative pattern so that the transparency of the decorative pattern changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%) higher than the first value, and if a first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of the decorative pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%.

In this way, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to inform customers that a starting win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, when the first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays a scrolling display of the decorative pattern so that the transparency of the decorative pattern changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%) higher than the first value, when the first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed in the low base state, the CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of the decorative pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, and when the first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed in the high base state, the CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of the decorative pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%.

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to inform the customer that the first or second start winning has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, even if the variable display of the small symbols begins with the occurrence of a first or second start winning, the transparency does not change while the decorative symbols are performing a variable start action, so the display will switch from the demo movie display to a background display for the variable display of the decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from the first value.

In addition, if a first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, and if a second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%.

In this way, regardless of whether the first or second start winning occurs, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to inform the customer that the start winning has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demo. Steering wheel operation version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance ends by steering operation will be described with reference to Fig. 59 to Fig. 60. Fig. 59 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends by steering operation in a low base state. Fig. 60 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends by steering operation in a low base state.

<Low base state>
An example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends by steering when the game state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 59 to 60. Note that, in the following, an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends by steering when the game state is in a low base state will be described, but an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends by steering when the game state is in a high base state will be omitted here because the example of operation is almost the same except that the background display and lamp data are changed to those for the high base.

As shown in Figures 59 to 60, in the low base state, if the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied is ended when the end condition E3 is satisfied, that is, based on steering wheel operation, the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begins.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the first part of the introduction to the second scene in the demo movie display is displayed, if a handle operation is detected and the end condition E3 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) starts (see FIG. 59(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E3 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen, and when it moves to the right side to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 59(C)).

In other words, when the end condition E3 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and starts illumination control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while starting switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background (stopped pattern) display, but the normal background display and decorative pattern start at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) after the end condition E3 is met (see Figures 59 (C) and 60).

In more detail, when termination condition E3 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify normal background display. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display to the performance control CPU 120, and upon receiving the extension command: B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending the extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to normal background display after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

As a result, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begins after a predetermined period of time th has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, so that the light emission control for the normal background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the first background display 004SG081, the decorative pattern, and the guide display.

In other words, if the operation of the ball operating handle 30 is detected while the demo movie display is being shown, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display.

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly indicate that the ball-hitting operation handle 30 has been operated and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, so that the change in the light emission pattern is easily noticeable to the player, and the player can be notified immediately that the end condition E3 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

(End of waiting demo performance Menu operation version)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance is ended by menu operation will be described with reference to Fig. 61 to Fig. 62. Fig. 61 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in a low base state. Fig. 62 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in a low base state. Fig. 63 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in a high base state.

<Low base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with an operation to open the menu display when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 61 to 63.

As shown in Figures 61 and 62, in the low base state, when the demo movie display that was started by the satisfaction of any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 is ended by the satisfaction of the end condition E4, that is, based on the operation of opening the menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter also referred to as the menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begins, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of them. Note that the operation of opening the menu display 004SG410 is assumed to be the operation of the push button 31B while the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but it may also be another operation such as the stick controller 31A.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination pattern based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when a menu operation is detected while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, and the end condition E4 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) begins (see FIG. 61(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E4 was satisfied, the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begin to be displayed, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 61(C)).

In other words, when the end condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and starts illumination control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while starting switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background and menu display 004SG410, but the normal background display and menu display 004SG410 starts at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) after the end condition E4 is met (see Figures 61 (C) and 62).

In more detail, when the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background and menu display 004SG410. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120, which has received the extended command: B10E, starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

As a result, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the menu display 004SG410 begins a predetermined period of time th after the lighting state of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has changed, so that the lighting control for the normal background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) starts before the demo movie display ends and changes to the display of the first background display 004SG081, the decorative pattern, and the menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the performance control CPU 120 detects an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 by using the push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, it switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display and menu guide display 004SG401.

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the customer that the demo movie display has ended because push button 31B has been operated to display menu guide display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, so that the change in the light emission pattern is easily noticeable to the player, and the player can be notified immediately that the end condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

<High base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with an operation to open the menu display when the gaming state is in a high base state will be described with reference to Figures 61 and 63.

As shown in Figures 61 and 63, in the high base state, when the demo movie display that was started by the satisfaction of any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 ends based on the satisfaction of the end condition E4, that is, the operation of opening the menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter also referred to as the menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (first background display 004SG081 in Figure 61) and the decorative pattern begins, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of them. Note that the operation of opening the menu display 004SG410 is the operation of the push button 31B while the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but it may also be another operation such as the stick controller 31A.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the first introductory part of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, if a menu operation is detected and termination condition E4 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in purple (or green) waves (blue in Figure 61 (B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E4 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern begins, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and further, the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see FIG. 61 (C)).

In other words, when the end condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts the illumination control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while starting the switching control of the display content from the demo movie display to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), but the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 start at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E4 was met (see Figures 61 (C) and 63).

In detail, when the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120, and upon receiving the extension command: B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. On the other hand, after the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 begins after a predetermined period of time th has elapsed since the lighting state of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, so that the lighting control for the high B background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the performance control CPU 120 detects an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 by using the push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, it switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410.

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the customer that the demo movie display has ended because push button 31B has been operated to display menu guide display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, so that the change in the light emission pattern is easily noticeable to the player, and the player can be notified immediately that the end condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) is applied as the menu luminance data table for the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a luminance data table with a different light emission pattern from the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) may be set as the menu luminance data table.

(End of customer waiting demo performance when the interruption conditions are met)
In this embodiment, when an interrupt condition is met while displaying a demo movie display, that is, when any of end condition E2 (start-up winning), end condition E3 (handle operation), and end condition E4 (menu operation) is met, or when end condition E1 (time passage) is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the demo movie display to a normal background display or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out display or the like which is displayed as a switching display.

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing as a sudden change by inserting a switching display, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interruption condition is made to appear as a sudden change without an interrupting display. By contrasting these events, it is possible to highlight the fact that the display ended due to an interruption, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the demo movie display is displayed in the low base state, if an interruption condition is met, that is, if any of the end conditions E2 (start-up winning), E3 (handle operation), and E4 (menu operation) is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the demo movie display to the normal background display without displaying a fade-out display or the like that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (time lapse) is met, and when the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, if an interruption condition is met, that is, if any of the end conditions E2 (start-up winning), E3 (handle operation), and E4 (menu operation) is met, the CPU 120 switches from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out display or the like that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (time lapse) is met.

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing as a sudden change by inserting a switching display, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interruption condition is made to appear as a sudden change without an interrupting display. By contrasting these events, it is possible to highlight the fact that the display ended due to an interruption, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an interruption condition is met while the demo movie display is being displayed, that is, when any of the end conditions E2 (start winning), E3 (handle operation), E4 (menu operation) is met, or when the end condition E1 (time lapse) is met, the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) from the demo movie display without displaying a fade-out display or the like that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (time lapse) is met. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when any of the end conditions E2 to E4 is met while the demo movie display is being displayed, the menu display 004SG410 may be displayed as a background display without displaying a switching display.

(End of waiting demo performance. Error occurred.)
Next, a case where an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance will be described based on Fig. 64 to Fig. 67. Fig. 64 is a timing chart showing a normal operation example of the payout device when a prize is won, and Fig. 64 is a timing chart showing an error operation example of the payout device when a prize is won. Fig. 65 is a diagram showing an operation example when a ball out error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance. Fig. 66 is a diagram for explaining the priority layer. Fig. 67 is a diagram showing a flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance started in a low base state. Fig. 68 is a diagram showing a flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance started in a high base state.

First, we will explain the ball out error, which is one type of error. The ball out error occurs when the payout device 004SG031 is operated by the payout control unit, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 64(A), when the conditions for paying out prize balls are met due to the occurrence of a winning prize or the like, the payout device 004SG031 performs a payout operation (for example, the rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, five balls), and the game balls are paid out into the payout passage. When all five game balls are detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 after the payout operation has started, the CPU 103 terminates the payout process as it considers the payout to have been successful. Therefore, the display screen of the image display device 5 does not display an error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 65(B)), which consists of a mark and the text display "Ball out error", and the main lamp 9a does not flash an error, as described below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), when a payout operation (e.g., rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) is performed by the payout device 004SG031 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 5 balls) in response to a winning prize, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the period during which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 has not detected a game ball while there are unpaid balls (e.g., the remaining 3 of the 5 game balls have not been detected) has continued for a first judgment period tl (e.g., tl = 5 seconds). If it is judged that no game balls have been detected within this first judgment period tl, that is, that the period during which no game balls have been detected while there are unpaid balls has continued for the first judgment period tl, it determines that the payout was not performed normally, and continues to perform a payout operation to pay out 5 game balls and a retry operation to repeatedly perform the detection judgment of game balls within the first judgment period tl until the number of unpaid balls (e.g., 5 balls) is detected.

If five game balls have not been detected even after the third retry operation has ended during this retry operation period, that is, if the period during which no game balls have been detected while there are unpaid balls continues for the second judgment period tm (e.g., 15 seconds, including the first judgment period tl), the CPU 103 determines that there may be a malfunction such as an insufficient supply of game balls to the payout device 004SG031, a malfunction of the payout device 004SG031, or balls clogging the payout passage, and sends an error designation command indicating that a ball out error has occurred and continues the retry operation.

Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the error designation command, switches the main lamp 9a to a flashing red light to notify an error, while the board lamp and side lamp 9b maintain their previous light emission control. Also, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error designation command, the display screen displays an error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 65 (B)) to notify an error.

In addition, after the CPU 103 transmits an error designation command indicating a ball out error, when the first game ball is detected by the retry operation, it transmits an error designation command to the performance control CPU 120 specifying that the ball out error has been cleared. In other words, even if there are two or more unpaid balls, when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the first judgment period tl or the second judgment period tm has elapsed since the first game ball was detected by the retry operation, the error designation command specifying the clearing of the ball out error is transmitted, so that the error notification can be terminated quickly without waiting until all unpaid balls are detected. In addition, when a predetermined period tk (e.g., tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the error clear designation command was received, the error display 004SG700 is erased from the display screen and the error notification is terminated.

If there are still unpaid balls remaining after sending an error designation command to clear the error, the retry operation will be started again, and if the number of unpaid game balls is not detected even after the third retry operation is restarted, an error designation command specifying a ball out error will be sent again, and the performance control CPU 120 will resume the error notification described above.

<Low base state>
Next, an example of operation when a bulb-out error that occurs during the variable display of the first special pattern that is started in a low base state continues even after the demo movie display has started will be described with reference to Figures 65 to 67.

As shown in Figures 65 to 67, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts in the low base state, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background (see Figure 65 (A)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp start to light up in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e keeps lighting up in white based on the default brightness data table.

Next, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an error command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), but switches to red flashing illumination control for the main lamp 9a in order to set the error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a in the priority layer, as shown in FIG. 66 (see FIG. 65 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 66, the normal layer is basically set with a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp according to the state, while the priority layer, which has priority over the normal layer, is set with an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) when an error occurs as described above. The error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used in preference to the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer to output brightness data to the LED driver, causing the main lamp 9a to flash red. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the light emission control time using the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the error message 004SG700 is displayed in the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen.

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are displayed statically in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen, and when it moves to the right side to a specified position and is displayed as an animation, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see Figure 65 (D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red.

In addition, when the start condition S1 for displaying the demo movie is met, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the board lamp and side lamp 9b is switched to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission mode based on white begins. Note that even if the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red (see FIG. 65 (E)). After that, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the start condition S1 for displaying the demo movie is met, the demo movie display begins (see FIG. 65 (F)).

After that, when the bulb failure error is released at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer, and the main lamp 9a also starts light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see FIG. 65 (G)). At this time, since the light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, it is possible to start light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) from a predetermined point in time during the demo movie display. Also, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed after the bulb failure error is released, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 65 (G)).

Although not shown in detail, the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol initiated by an irregular win or the like in a low base state and continues after the demo movie display has started is similar to the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol initiated in a low base state and continues after the demo movie display has started, as shown in FIG. 65, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, if a bulb-out error (specific error) occurs during variable display, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb-out error, and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, it continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the second period, it continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by having the lamp continue to notify of specific errors that occur during play (for example, a bulb-out error) whether the background is being displayed or the demo movie is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of bulb-out errors, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb-out error, and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb-out error, and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by continuing to use the lamp to notify of specific errors that occur during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, whether the background is being displayed or the demo movie is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of bulb-out errors, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

<High base state>
Next, an example of operation when a bulb-out error that occurs during the variable display of the second special pattern that is started in a high base state continues even after the demo movie display has started will be explained based on Figure 68 and with reference to Figure 65.

As shown in Figure 68, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the high base state, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background (see Figure 65 (A)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp start to light up in purple (or green) waves based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e keeps lighting up in white based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives an error designation command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), while for the main lamp 9a, as shown in FIG. 66, it switches to red flashing illumination control in order to set the error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a in the priority layer (see FIG. 65 (B)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 66, basically, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp is set in the normal layer according to the state, while the priority layer, which has priority over the normal layer, is set with a brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) when an error occurs as described above. Then, the main lamp 9a flashes red by outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) in preference to the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction), etc.) set in the normal layer. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the time of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction), etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the error message 004SG700 is displayed in the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen (see Figure 65 (C)).

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are displayed statically in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen, and when it moves to the right side to a specified position and is displayed as an animation, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see Figure 65 (D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red.

When the demo movie display start condition S1 is met, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the board lamp and side lamp 9b is switched to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission mode based on white begins. Note that even if the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red (see Figure 65 (E)). After that, the demo movie display starts when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was met (see Figure 65 (F)).

After that, when the bulb failure error is released at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer, and the main lamp 9a also starts light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see FIG. 65 (G)). At this time, since the light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, it is possible to start light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) from a predetermined point in time during the demo movie display. Also, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed after the bulb failure error is released, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 65 (G)).

Although not shown in detail, the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol initiated by an irregular win or the like in a high base state and continues after the demo movie display has started is similar to the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol initiated in a high base state and continues after the demo movie display has started, as shown in FIG. 68, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error, and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state, controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error, and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by having the lamp continue to notify of a bulb failure error that occurs during variable display in both the low base state and the high base state, even when the background is being displayed or the demo movie is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable bulb failure error notifications, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb-out error, and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb-out error, and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by continuing to use the lamp to notify of specific errors that occur during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, whether the background is being displayed or the demo movie is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of bulb-out errors, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the customer waiting demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is different from the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the customer waiting demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is white, while the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the lighting conditions during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) is different from the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) is blue, while the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the lighting conditions during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the brightness data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different predominant colors, and the brightness data constituting the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different predominant colors. Specifically, the predominant color in the brightness data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) is blue, while the predominant color in the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 35). In addition, the color that accounts for a large proportion of the brightness data that makes up the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) is green (for time reduction) or purple (for probability change), while the color that accounts for a large proportion of the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time-saving)), it is possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display regardless of which background is being displayed, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability change), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that make up the majority of the colors are different between the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the brightness data for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb blown error has occurred based on the lighting conditions during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that make up the majority of the colors are different between the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: variable background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the lighting state during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In the present embodiment, an example is given of a form in which red flashing light emission control is performed based on an error brightness data table set in the priority layer when an error is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and light emission control may be performed based on dedicated error brightness data (grandchild data) that causes a lamp dedicated to error notification to flash red when an error is notified.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an error is notified, the main lamp 9a of the frame lamps is used to control the light emission for error notification. However, since the error lamp is illuminated to attract the attention of game store staff, the main lamp 9a is placed at the highest point of the frame lamp where it will not be hidden by the player and is the easiest for game store staff to notice, but the side lamp 9b or other lamps may also be used.

In addition, if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time shortened)). and controls the side lamp 9b and the board lamp, and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that make up the majority are different between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that make up the majority are different between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The brightness data constituting the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visually recognized by the player differs. Specifically, the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) has a white-based light emission behavior, whereas the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that a bulb blown error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the display of the demo movie, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb-out error does not occur while the background is being displayed, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and board lamp are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable), and if a bulb-out error occurs while the background is being displayed, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb-out error does not occur during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb-out error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the light-emitting operation patterns of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) visually recognized by the player are different between the brightness data constituting the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) lights up in blue waves, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) lights up in purple (or green) waves, while the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: guaranteed bonus background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the display of the demo movie, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The brightness data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission operation modes of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) seen by the player are different, and the brightness data constituting the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission operation modes of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) seen by the player are different. Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) lights up in blue waves, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) lights up in purple (or green) waves, and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see Figure 35).

In this way, the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), making it possible to suggest that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the demo movie display, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

In addition, if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state In this case, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb-out error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has ended, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb-out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the brightness data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light-emitting operation modes of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) visually recognized by the player are different, and the brightness data constituting the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light-emitting operation modes of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) visually recognized by the player are different. Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) lights up in a blue wave, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) lights up in a purple (or green) wave, and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see Figure 35).

In this way, the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), making it possible to suggest that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the demo movie display, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

The brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data table for the error (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission operation modes of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b that are visually recognized by the player are different. Specifically, in the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based light emission mode, and in the brightness data table for the error (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b are lit in a mode according to the state (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that an error has occurred based on the lighting state during the display of the demo movie, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: guaranteed change background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission operation modes of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b that are visually recognized by the player are different. Specifically, in the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: guaranteed change background), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are lit in blue waves, green waves, or purple waves, and in the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b are lit in a manner according to the state (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: guaranteed bonus background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, When a bulb-out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state is completed, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and when a bulb-out error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state is completed, the main lamp 9a and the side lamp 9b and the board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and when a bulb-out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state is completed, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the light-emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b that are visually recognized by the player differ between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the light-emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b that are visually recognized by the player differ between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave, in the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), they light up in a purple (or green) wave, and in the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a manner appropriate to the state (see Figure 35).

In this way, the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), making it possible to suggest that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The above-mentioned light-emitting operation modes are light-emitting modes that allow the player to see some kind of movement, and include, for example, blinking: a mode in which the light is turned on and off alternately, and swaying (hazy): a mode in which the brightness changes (e.g., changing from RGB: 700 to RGB: 400), but turning on and off without a change in brightness is not included in the light-emitting operation modes. For example, in the case of swaying (hazy), it is preferable to make the brightness of the specific light-emitting means different from the previous brightness data on the assumption that the second brightness data is used after the first brightness data, such as setting the specific light-emitting means to the first brightness (RGB is 100) during the first brightness data x ms (or making the combination of the brightness of the first, second, and third colors the first combination), setting the specific light-emitting means to the second brightness (RGB is A00) during the second brightness data y ms (or making the combination of the brightness of the first, second, and third colors the second combination), etc.

In addition, when the conditions for dispensing game balls are met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball out error occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) at the timing related to the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detecting the first (first) game ball dispensed, regardless of whether the game balls dispensed to the dispensing device 004SG031 (dispensing section) exceed the number of game balls to be dispensed when a ball out error occurs during the second customer waiting period, or whether the game balls dispensed to the dispensing device 004SG031 do not exceed the number of game balls to be dispensed.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout device 004SG031, the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the demo movie display at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, so that the demo movie display can be made to look natural and the processing can be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, when the conditions for paying out game balls are met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball out error occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability change) at the timing related to the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detecting the first (first) game ball that has been distributed, regardless of whether the ball out error occurs during the first customer waiting period and game balls exceeding the number of unpaid game balls are distributed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout section) or game balls not exceeding the number of unpaid game balls are distributed to the payout device 004SG031, to control the board lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout device 004SG031, the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is switched to the light emission mode corresponding to the background display at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, so that the background display can be made to look natural and the processing can be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, during the second waiting period, if the condition for paying out the game ball is met and the period during which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball continues for the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl), the brightness data table for waiting for customers (lamp data table: waiting for customers demo) is switched to the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) to control the board lamp and frame lamp, and when a bulb-out error occurs during the second waiting period, when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected the game ball, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) is switched to the brightness data table for waiting for customers (lamp data table: waiting for customers demo) to control the board lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, when the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 is not detecting a ball, this may be due to a bulb failure error, but since there is also the possibility of a delayed ball, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is not immediately switched. Instead, when a gaming ball is detected, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to a lighting mode that corresponds to the demo movie display, allowing the demo movie display to be displayed without any sense of incongruity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, during the first waiting period, if the condition for paying out the game ball is met and the period during which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball continues for the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl), the board lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) to the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and when a bulb-out error occurs during the first waiting period, when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected the game ball, the board lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable).

In this way, when the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 is not detecting a ball, this may be due to a bulb failure error, but since there is also the possibility of a delayed ball, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is not immediately switched. Instead, when a gaming ball is detected, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to a lighting mode that corresponds to the background display, allowing the background display to look natural and resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Output mechanism to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data for turning on/blinking/extinguishing one or more of the multiple LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9 to the LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In the following, the control of turning on/blinking/extinguishing a lamp such as an LED by the performance control CPU 120 is also called lamp control. The LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120 in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blink/extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a lamp data table that contains brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The lamp data table includes an error lamp data table that is used when an error occurs, an SP reach lamp data table that is used during a super reach, and a background lamp data table.

Furthermore, the background lamp data table includes a normal background lamp data table used in the normal state (normal background shown in FIG. 77), a fanfare background lamp data table used in the fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, a jackpot background lamp data table used during a round in the jackpot game state, an ending background lamp data table used in the ending state in which an ending effect that notifies the end of the jackpot game state is executed, a probability variable background lamp data table used in the probability variable state (probability variable background shown in FIG. 77), a time-saving background lamp data table used in the time-saving state (time-saving background shown in FIG. 77), and a customer waiting lamp data table used in the customer waiting state (customer waiting demo shown in FIG. 77).

The above-mentioned background lamp data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background lamp data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states the game is controlled to, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, probability change state, time-saving state, and waiting state. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background lamp data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background lamp data table to the LED driver. This allows each game effect lamp 9 to be lamp-controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error lamp data table, the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, the priority is highest in the error lamp data table, followed by the SP reach lamp data table, and then the background lamp data table.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 outputs brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in the normal state and the effect develops into a super reach effect, it uses the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect in preference to the normal background lamp data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver. As a result, when the effect develops into a super reach effect while the game effect lamps 9 are controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background lamp data table, the game effect lamps 9 that do not have brightness data set based on the SP reach lamp data table are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table, but the game effect lamps 9 that have brightness data set based on the SP reach lamp data table are controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach effect based on the SP reach lamp data table. During the period when the brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is being output to the LED driver, for lamps for which brightness data is set based on the SP Reach lamp data table, the brightness data based on the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver, and when the normal state is restored after the Super Reach performance ends, the brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table is output to the LED driver. Also, when a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered after the Super Reach performance ends, the brightness data based on the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver, and the lamps are controlled in a manner based on the fanfare background lamp data table for all lamps.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background lamp data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the performance progresses to a super reach performance, the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach performance is used preferentially over the background lamp data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background lamp data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach lamp data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table, but since the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach lamp data table, the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. After the Super Reach performance ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that was being updated. Note that for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is not set, the performance control CPU 120 continues to output the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table to the LED driver.

Also, for example, when an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in the normal state or while outputting brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table during a super reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table, but for the lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is used in preference to the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table, and brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the error lamp data table. As a result, for the lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error lamp data table. Furthermore, for lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set during the period in which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table is not output to the LED driver, and when the error is cleared and the game returns to the normal state or the game state during the super reach performance, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the time of lamp control corresponding to the normal state and lamp control corresponding to the super reach performance being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the normal background lamp data table corresponding to the normal state and the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach performance, but when an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error lamp data table corresponding to the error in preference to the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the time of lamp control using the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. In other words, even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error lamp data table, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table, but since the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table have a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error lamp data table, the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table are not output to the LED driver. After the error is released, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that was being updated. Note that for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set, the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table continues to be output to the LED driver.

[Lighting state of the game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, the lamps of each game effect lamp 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off", "almost off", "on", and "blinking" are used to refer to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As described above, the states of each game effect lamp 9 according to "on" and "blinking" are also referred to as "lighting states".

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has a very low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data is "000", the corresponding LED is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED is lit in white with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes a constant lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, a wave lighting state in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and a hazy lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." The brightness data is hexadecimal data that can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

The term "blinking" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is in a state other than the above-mentioned "off" and "on", and in which the brightness of each lamp when it is on alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "blinking" includes repeating on and off or almost off, and specifically, "blinking" includes switching over time between a case in which the brightness data is any of "2" to "F" and a case in which the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, there is a hazy lighting as a lighting state of the lamp, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing its brightness, whereas the blinking is a state in which all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly lit and off or almost off.

[Explanation of the game effect lamp]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using lamp data tables]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a lamp data table stored in the ROM 121 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 to light/blink/turn off through lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command sent from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one for each frame (33 ms) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying corresponding to each part, the display control unit 123 performs display control of the image display device 5 based on the image data (moving image data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extension command (for example, extension command BXXX (where "X" is any value (0 to F)) corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control it is performing, and transmits the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 123.

Figure 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. As shown in Figure 70, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs a specified display control, it sends an extension command (BXXX) for specifying the display control to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (XXX (parent)) corresponding to the specified display control.

The parent table stores information specifying which lamps (lighted or unlit) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are subject to lamp control, information specifying the child table to be referenced during lamp control corresponding to the lamps subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 72, side lamp 9b is specified as the target of lamp control. In addition, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX is specified corresponding to side lamp 9, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table. Note that for lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which no corresponding information is stored in the parent table (main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, button lamp 9e in FIG. 72), lamp control based on the information last set in the parent table will continue to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 70, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of a lamp specified in a parent table using a specified child table, for example, if 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 ms to time this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs the counter subtraction process 60,000 times to time 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until the maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is timed. In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 receives a new extension command after receiving an extension command and before the maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is timed, the performance control CPU 120 stops the lamp control being performed and performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the newly received extension command. Although it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control using the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). Even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it is possible to continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

In the child table, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for lamp control are stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the child table only stores information about lamps that are the subject of lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not the subject of lamp control.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 73, corresponding to side lamp 9b (XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX), the following are specified in the order in which lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_1 and this grandchild table is performed: execution time: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 and this grandchild table is performed: execution time: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_3 and this grandchild table is performed: execution time: 230 ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 and this grandchild table is performed: execution time: 600,000 ms, in which lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 and this grandchild table is performed: Furthermore, for the game effect lamps 9 for which no corresponding information is stored in the child table (in FIG. 73, the main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), lamp control based on the information last set in the child table will continue.

As shown in FIG. 70, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified first, times the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified next, for all the specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in FIG. 73, for the side lamp 9b, first, lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 until 500 ms is timed, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 500 ms is timed, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 until 230 ms is timed, and then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 600,000 ms is timed. Although it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, the last grandchild table specified sets the maximum time for lamp control to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the performance display (performance scene), so that the currently running lamp control can be continued for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason.

In addition, in the child table, when the side lamp 9b is the target of lamp control, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, one grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 may be specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, or two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 and XD___LWU_2_XXX_1 may be specified, not shown. Then, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the performance control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified as the grandchild tables corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to perform lamp control of the left side lamp 9b, and uses the other grandchild table to perform lamp control of the right side lamp 9b. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, common lamp control is performed for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, whereas when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b.

The grandchild table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, brightness data that is referenced during lamp control and information that specifies the execution time for lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the grandchild table only stores information about lamps that are the subject of lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not the subject of lamp control.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 74, the following data are stored for side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1): luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000; execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 100 ms; luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000; execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms; luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these brightness data is executed. Note that for lamps that do not have corresponding information stored among the game effect lamps 9 in the grandchild table (main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, button lamp 9e in FIG. 74), lamp control based on the information in the grandchild table last set before is continued.

In the brightness data of the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1) in the grandchild tables shown in Figures 72 to 74, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. , the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the ninth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 11 indicate the RGB values of the eleventh lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, when separate grandchild tables are specified for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, in the brightness data for the left side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_~), the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the left The data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits to the third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits to the third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits to the third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits to the sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the ninth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits to the third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lowest digits to the third digits of the data corresponding to number 11 indicate the RGB values of the left side lamp 9 and in the brightness data for the right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_2_~), the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the ninth lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, and the lowest digits of the data corresponding to number 11 indicate the RGB values of the eleventh lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b.

Although not shown, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LMAIN_~) that specifies the main lamp 9a, the values of the lowest digits from the first to third digits indicate the RGB values of the main lamp 9a. In the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LLOGO_~) that specifies the movable body lamp 9d, the values of the lowest digits from the fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d, the values of the lowest digits from the first to third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d, the values of the lowest digits from the fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d, and the values of the lowest digits from the first to third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d. In addition, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LSLMP_~) that specifies the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 5 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. In addition, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LATAK_~) that specifies the attacca lamp 9c, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c. In addition, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LPUSH_~) that specifies the button lamp 9e, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the button lamp 9e.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the subject of the lamp control. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. Specifically, the brightness data is divided into 16 levels of current value from 0 to F, and when the brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when the brightness data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element, when the brightness data of "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when the brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can emit light in various colors by passing a current corresponding to brightness data through each RGB element. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can also be lit in colors corresponding to each performance or character by emitting light based on brightness data. As an example, when data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. When data "F0F" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in reddish purple. When data "FF0" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in yellow.

As shown in FIG. 70, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, it performs the process of, for example, outputting the first specified brightness data to the LED driver, timing the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputting the next specified brightness data to the LED driver, for all specified brightness data, in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in FIG. 73, for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the following luminance data is output to the LED driver until 100 ms is first counted, and then the following luminance data is output to the LED driver until 120 ms is counted: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 The CPU 120 outputs 0x000 to the LED driver, and then outputs the following brightness data to the LED driver until 120 ms is clocked: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, and 0x5AA. The CPU 120 then outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, 0x5AA, and 0x5AA until 40 ms is clocked. The LED driver then passes a current corresponding to the received brightness data through the specified LED based on the received brightness data. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and performs lamp control based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while decrementing the timers at regular intervals (e.g., 10 ms intervals).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the figure. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 71, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, 500 ms is specified as the time when the first lamp control is performed for the side lamp 9b, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 is specified, 500 ms is specified as the time when the second lamp control is performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified, 230 ms is specified as the time when the third lamp control is performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 is specified, and 600,000 ms is specified as the time when the fourth lamp control is performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, the luminance data (RGB data) for the side lamp 9b is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x499" at 100 ms intervals. For ease of explanation, the luminance data in the first 100 ms will be called data 1, the luminance data in the second 100 ms will be called data 2, the luminance data in the third 100 ms will be called data 3, and the luminance data in the fourth 100 ms will be called data 4.

When controlling lamps for the second grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, the performance control CPU 120 counts the specified 500 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until the count reaches 500 ms. However, if the count has not yet reached 500 ms after outputting data 1 through data 4, the brightness data is output again to the LED driver in order starting from the first data 1. When the count eventually reaches 500 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 specified by the child table.

When controlling lamps for the fourth specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, the performance control CPU 120 times the specified 600,000 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until the time reaches 600,000 ms. However, if the time has not yet reached 600,000 ms after outputting data 1 through data 4, the brightness data will again be output to the LED driver in order starting from the first data 1. When the time reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. At this time, because the child table does not have a next grandchild table specified, output of luminance data based on the grandchild table first specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 will begin. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the clock will not reach 600,000 ms, and if the next extension command is received from the display control unit 123 before the clock reaches 600,000 ms, output of luminance data based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table specified in the newly received extension command will begin.

As shown in the parent table in FIG. 72, the maximum time for lamp control by a child table is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in this parent table serves as a measure against malfunctions. That is, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables to control the lamps based on the performance control command from the main board 11, but even if some malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so it is possible to prevent different lamp controls from being performed one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Also, as in the child table shown in Figure 73, the execution time for lamp control by the last-specified grandchild table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The 10-minute data in such a child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again by the first-specified grandchild table of the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still remaining.

In addition, in the grandchild table, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that references the last specified brightness data. With this configuration, the 10-minute data in the brightness data serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again using the brightness data specified at the beginning of the grandchild table when the timer corresponding to the grandchild table has reached 0, due to the timer of the child table still remaining. In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, preventing the problem of continuous changes in the lamp lighting. Furthermore, by specifying brightness data spanning 600,000 ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, the problem of continuous changes in the lamp lighting can be more effectively prevented.

[Lamp data table used during non-play 1]
FIG. 77 shows a lamp data table used when not playing (only the white button flashing and the red button flashing are used during playing).

The background normal shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the normal background image, and the presentation control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the background normal when it receives the extended command: B10E transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the normal background image after power is restored (when controlled to the normal state), after the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the game state ends, after the end of the fluctuations in the normal state, after the end of the last game fluctuation in the time-saving state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the normal state), after the end of the demo movie in the normal state, and after the end of the menu display in the normal state.

The background time-saving shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the time-saving background image, and the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the normal background when it receives the extended command: B11D transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the time-saving background image after power is restored (when controlled to the time-saving state), after the end of fluctuations in the time-saving state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the time-saving state), after the end of the demo movie in the time-saving state, and after the end of the menu display in the time-saving state.

The background probability change shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the probability change background image, and the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the normal background when it receives the extended command: B121 sent in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the probability change background image after power is restored (if controlled to the probability change state), after the fluctuation in the probability change state ends, after the jackpot game state ends (if controlled to the probability change state), after the demo movie in the probability change state ends, and after the menu display in the probability change state ends.

The customer waiting demo shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the customer waiting demo performance, and the performance control CPU 120 uses the customer waiting demo to control the lamps of the game effect lamps 9 when the conditions for starting the customer waiting demo performance are met and the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: BF01 transmitted in response to control to display an image corresponding to the customer waiting demo performance.

The button white light shown in FIG. 77 is the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e, which corresponds to non-playing states except during initialization notification, and the presentation control CPU 120 uses the button white light to control the play effect lamp 9 when it receives the extended command: B001 sent from the display control unit 123 after power is restored, after the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the play state has ended, and after the operation prompt presentation has ended.

The button flashing white shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompting effect, and when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extension command: B002 transmitted in conjunction with control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect of causing the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, the effect control CPU 120 uses the button flashing white to control the game effect lamp 9.

The button flashing red shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompting effect, and when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B003 transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect of causing the button lamp 9e to flash red during play, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 by flashing the button white.

The button lamp 9e is not specified in the lamp data table used except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompt presentation, and the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the white button illumination except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompt presentation. Also, since the white button illumination, white flashing button, and red flashing button do not specify game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e, even if the presentation control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying the white button illumination, white flashing button, or red flashing button, the lamp control of the game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e is continued based on the previous lamp data table.

The initialization notification shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table corresponding to the initialization notification, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command: BFFF that is sent in conjunction with the display control unit 123 performing control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, the performance control CPU 120 uses initialization to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9.

The error shown in Figure 77 is the lamp data table of the main lamp 9a corresponding to an error notification, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command: BFF1 sent from the display control unit 123 in response to the occurrence of an error, it uses the error to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, since an error does not specify any game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying an error, it continues to control the game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a based on the previous lamp data table.

[Lamp Data Table: Background Normal]
Figure 78 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: background normal used when the extension command: B10E is received, Figure 79 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: background normal, and Figures 80 and 81 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background normal.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B10E transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of a normal background image, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the normal background parent table based on the extended command: B10E. As shown in FIG. 78, the normal background parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B10E, it performs lamp control of the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP specified by the normal background parent table.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP contains the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time, as shown in Figure 79.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO (Figure 80) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO is set with the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced, as shown in FIG. 80. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO is set with a blue-based brightness, and the main lamp 9a is lit in a state where the brightness changes with a blue base.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO until 600,000 ms have elapsed, and if 600,000 ms has elapsed, it sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command.

As shown in Figures 78 to 81, the normal background parent table has child tables set that also refer to the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacca lamps 9c, and these child tables also have grandchild tables, etc., that they refer to. These grandchild tables also have the brightness data, etc., that they refer to set in the order of execution. The performance control CPU 120 controls the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacca lamps 9c in the same manner as above, by referring to the child table specified by the parent table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the background normal child table references for the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c also has a blue-based brightness set, and the lighting state for the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c changes brightness with a blue base.

In addition, since the normal background parent table does not have a child table or grandchild table set for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Time Reduction]
Figure 82 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: background time reduction used when the extended command: B11D is received, Figure 83 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: background time reduction, and Figures 84 to 85 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background time reduction.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives the extended command: B11D transmitted in association with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the background image for time saving, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance specifies the parent table for the background time saving based on the extended command: B11D. As shown in Figs. 82 to 85, the parent table for the background time saving has child tables set to refer to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c, and these child tables have grandchild tables to refer to, and these grandchild tables have brightness data to refer to set in the order of execution. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c in the same procedure as for the normal background, referring to the child table specified by the parent table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the background time reduction child table references for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c is set to a brightness with a green base, and the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c are also lit in a way that changes brightness with a green base.

In addition, since no child or grandchild tables for button lamp 9e are set in the parent table for background time reduction, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table previously set (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Chance Variation]
Figure 86 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: background probability change used when the extension command: B121 is received, Figure 87 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: background probability change, and Figures 88 to 89 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background probability change.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives the extended command B121 transmitted in association with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the background image for the probability change, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance specifies the parent table for the background probability change based on the extended command B121. As shown in Figs. 86 to 89, the parent table for the background probability change has child tables set to refer to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c, and these child tables have grandchild tables to refer to, and these grandchild tables have brightness data to refer to set in the order of execution. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c in the same procedure as for the normal background, referring to the child table specified by the parent table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the background probability change child table references for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c is set to a purple-based brightness, and the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c are also lit in a way that changes brightness with a purple base.

In addition, since the parent table of the background probability change does not have a child table or grandchild table set for the button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously (button lit white).

[Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo]
Figure 90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo used when the extended command: BF01 is received, Figure 91 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, and Figures 92 to 98 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01 sent when the display control unit performs display control of the customer waiting demo display performance, it specifies the parent table of the customer waiting demo based on the extended command: BF01. As shown in FIG. 90, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a for a maximum of 600,000 ms by referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it performs lamp control of the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO contains the grandchild tables and execution times of main lamp 9a in the order of reference, as shown in Figure 91.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92) that is set first in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes white when the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance starts.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 93 and 94) which is set second in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white for the period of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and the lighting state changes in accordance with the movement of the letters in the company name.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 9,500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, it controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 114), which is set as the third table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. The common table is a grandchild table that is commonly referenced even when the parent table is different. As a result, the main lamp 9a is turned off during the periods of the Model Introduction 1, Model Introduction 2-1, Model Introduction 3-1, Model Introduction 2-2, Model Introduction 3-1, and Model Introduction 2-3 parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance measures 30,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, it controls the lamps by referring to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 115), which is set as the fourth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table that is also used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes color to a rainbow color during the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92), which is set as the fifth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes white at the start of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (FIG. 115) which is set as the sixth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes color to a rainbow color over the duration of one subtitle part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92), which is set as the seventh grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (FIG. 115) which is set as the eighth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes color to a rainbow color over the period of the two subtitle parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 4,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, it controls the lamps by referring to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 114), which is set as the ninth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a is turned off for 500 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 98), which is set as the 10th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white during the Attention 1 and Attention 2 parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 4000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 114) that is set as the 11th table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a will be turned off for 500 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then receives an extension command (B10E, B11D or B121) sent when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as normal background, and switches to lamp control using the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off until a new extension command is received, and when a new extension command is received, it switches to a light emission mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in FIG. 90, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to perform lamp control for the side lamp 9b for a maximum of 600,000 ms by referencing the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it performs lamp control for the side lamp 9b by referencing the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo.

In child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, the grandchild tables of side lamp 9b and the execution times are set in the order of reference, as shown in FIG. 91.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92) that is set first in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes white when the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance starts.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 93 and 94) which is the second grandchild table set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up in white for the period of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and the lighting state changes in accordance with the movement of the letters in the company name.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 9,500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, it performs lamp control by referencing the third common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 114) in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03 (Figure 95), which is the fourth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of Model Introduction 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamps 9b change color in the following order according to the type of character that appears: green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, white.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 12,500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03, it performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 96), which is set as the fifth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of machine introduction 2-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the light emission state changes in a predetermined pattern.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 97), which is set as the sixth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes green for the period of Model Introduction 3-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 96), which is set as the seventh grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of Model Introduction 2-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the lighting state changes in a predetermined pattern.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 97), which is set as the eighth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes green for the period of Model Introduction 3-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 96), which is set as the ninth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of Model Introduction 2-3, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the lighting state changes in a predetermined pattern.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 114) that is set as the 10th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b will be turned off for 500 ms.

Then, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it controls the lamps by referring to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 115), which is set as the 11th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table that is also used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes color to a rainbow color for the duration of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92) which is set as the 12th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, at the start of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b flashes white.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 115) which is set as the 13th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes color to a rainbow color for the duration of one subtitle part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92) that is set as the 14th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, at the start of the subtitle 2 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b flashes white.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 115) which is set as the 15th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes color to a rainbow color over the period of the two subtitle parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 4,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 114), which is set as the 16th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 98), which is set as the 17th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamps 9b are lit in white during the Attention 1 and Attention 2 parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 4000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 114) that is set as the 18th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b will be turned off for 500 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D or B121) sent when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as normal background, and switches to lamp control using the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command. As a result, the side lamp 9b continues to be turned off until a new extended command is received, and when a new extended command is received, it switches to a light emission mode based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figures 90 to 98, the parent table for the customer waiting demo has child tables set that also refer to the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c, and these child tables have grandchild tables, etc., set in the order of execution to which they refer, and these grandchild tables have brightness data, etc., set in the order of execution to which they refer, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c in the same manner as above, by referring to the child table specified in the parent table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

As a result, after the start of the customer waiting demo performance, the movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c flash white for 500 ms at the start of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, light up in white for the period of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and the light emission mode changes in accordance with the movement of the letters of the company name, then turn off for 500 ms, and the light color changes in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white in accordance with the type of character that appears during the period of model introduction 1 that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, light up in white for the period of model introduction 2-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern, flashing green for the period of model introduction 3-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, light up in white for the period of model introduction 2-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern, flashing green for the period of model introduction 3-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and It lights up in white for the period of model introduction 2-3 that constitutes the performance, and the light emission state changes in a predetermined pattern, then it is turned off for 500 ms, the light emission color changes to rainbow colors for the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, it flashes white at the start of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the light emission color changes to rainbow colors for the period of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, it flashes white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the light emission color changes to rainbow colors for the period of the subtitle 2 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, then it is turned off for 500 ms, it lights up in white for the periods of the attention call 1 and attention call 2 that constitute the customer waiting demo performance, then it is turned off for 500 ms, and it remains turned off until a new extended command is received, and when a new extended command is received, it switches to the light emission state based on the received extended command.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table: customer waiting demo based on the extended command: BF01, so that the main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c change in light color and light pattern according to each part of the customer waiting demo performance.

In addition, since no child or grandchild tables for button lamp 9e are set in the parent table of the customer waiting demo, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table previously set (button white light).

In addition, in the Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo, grandchild tables are specified for the Company Name Part, Model Introduction 1 Part, Model Introduction 2-1, Model Introduction 3-1, Model Introduction 2-2, Model Introduction 3-2, Model Introduction 2-3, Main Title Part, Subtitle 1 Part, Subtitle 2 Part, and Warning Part for the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c, so that lamp control can be performed so that the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c will emit light in a manner appropriate to each part.

In addition, for the Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo, for the main lamp 9a, a grandchild table is specified for each of the company name part, model introduction part, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and warning part, while for model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, and model introduction 2-3 that make up the model introduction part, one grandchild table is specified, so the overall amount of data can be reduced.

In addition, the Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo does not have a grandchild table for button lamp 9e, and for button lamp 9e, lamp control is performed based on one grandchild table from before the customer waiting demo, so the overall amount of data can be reduced.

For grandchild tables that control the lights to be off or illuminate in rainbow colors, the lamps are controlled using a common table that is also used by other parent tables, reducing the overall amount of data. Grandchild tables that temporarily illuminate in white can also be controlled using a common table.

[Lamp Data Table: Button White Light]
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the Lamp Data Table: Button White Light used when the extension command: B001 is received, FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the Lamp Data Table: Button White Light, and FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the Lamp Data Table: Button White Light.

When the CPU 120 for controlling presentation receives an extended command: B001 sent from the display control unit 123 after power is restored, after the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the game state is completed, or after the operation prompt presentation is completed, the CPU 120 for controlling presentation specifies the parent table for the button lighting white based on the extended command: B001. As shown in FIG. 99, the parent table for the button lighting white is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the CPU 120 for controlling presentation receives an extended command: B001, the CPU 120 for controlling presentation controls the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the button lighting white.

Child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 100.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU (Figure 101) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in FIG. 101, the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU is set with the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU is set to a brightness that emits white light, and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms has elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B002 or B003) that changes the lighting state of the button lamp 9e before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command.

In addition, since the parent table for the white button light does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacca lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table that was previously set.

[Lamp Data Table: Button flashing white]
Figure 102 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: button blinking white used when the extended command: B002 is received, Figure 103 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: button blinking white, and Figure 104 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: button blinking white.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives an extended command: B002 transmitted in association with control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to an operation prompt presentation that causes the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation specifies a parent table for the button flashing white based on the extended command: B002. As shown in FIG. 102, the parent table for the button flashing white is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the extended command: B002, the CPU 120 controls the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the button flashing white.

Child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in FIG. 103.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU (Figure 104) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in FIG. 104, the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU is set with the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU is set to a brightness that emits white light and an off state, and the button lamp 9e flashes white.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms has elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) that changes the lighting state of the button lamp 9e before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command.

In addition, since the parent table for the white blinking button does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacca lamp 9c, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table that was previously set.

[Lamp Data Table: Button flashing red]
Figure 105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the Lamp Data Table: Red Flashing Button used when the extended command: B003 is received, Figure 106 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the Lamp Data Table: Red Flashing Button, and Figure 107 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the Lamp Data Table: Red Flashing Button.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the extended command: B003 transmitted in association with the control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the operation prompt presentation of making the button lamp 9e flash red during gameplay, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation specifies the parent table for the flashing red button based on the extended command: B003. As shown in FIG. 105, the parent table for the flashing red button is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the extended command: B003, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation controls the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the flashing red button.

Child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in FIG. 106.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU (Figure 107) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in FIG. 107, the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU is set with the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU is set to a brightness of red light and an off state, and the button lamp 9e flashes red.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU until 600,000 ms has elapsed. If 600,000 ms has elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) that changes the lighting state of the button lamp 9e before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command.

In addition, since the parent table for the red flashing button does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacca lamp 9c, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table that was previously set.

[Lamp Data Table: Initialization Notification]
Figure 108 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: initialization notification used when the extended command: BFFF is received, Figure 109 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: initialization notification, and Figure 110 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: initialization notification.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFFF transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 performing control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the initialization notification based on the extended command: BFFF. As shown in FIG. 108, the parent table of the initialization notification is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFFF, it performs lamp control of the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP specified by the parent table of the initialization notification.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP contains the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time, as shown in FIG. 109.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA (Figure 110) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in FIG. 110, the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA is set with the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA is set with a brightness that causes the lamp to emit red light, and the main lamp 9a lights up in red.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms has elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command.

As shown in Figures 108 to 110, the parent table for the initialization notification has child tables set up that also refer to the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, attacca lamps 9c, and button lamps 9e. These child tables also have grandchild tables etc. set up to refer to. These grandchild tables also have brightness data etc. set up in the order of execution to be referenced. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table specified by the parent table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table to control the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, attacca lamps 9c, and button lamps 9e in the same procedure as above.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the initialization notification child table references for the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e is also set to a brightness that causes the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e to light up in red.

[Lamp Data Table: Error]
Figure 111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error parent table used when the extension command: BFF1 is received, Figure 112 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error child table, and Figure 113 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error grandchild table.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1 sent from the display control unit 123 due to the occurrence of an error, it specifies the error parent table based on the extended command: BFF1. As shown in FIG. 111, the error parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1, it performs lamp control of the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP specified by the error parent table.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP contains the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time, as shown in FIG. 112.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR (Figure 113) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in FIG. 113, the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR is set with the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR is set with the brightness of red light and an off state, and the main lamp 9a flashes red.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms has elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command.

In addition, since the error parent table does not have child or grandchild tables set for the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table that was set previously.

[Common Table]
The common table is a grandchild table that is also referenced by child tables set in different parent tables, and as shown in Figures 114 to 118, it includes a common table (XD___L to _OFF) that turns off the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, a common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01) that slowly changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e to rainbow colors, and a common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_02) that quickly changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e to rainbow colors.

These common tables are provided for each of the in-lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, and it is possible to control some of the game effect lamps 9 using the common table.

By providing a common table that can be referenced from child tables set in different parent tables to control lamps in this way, data volume can be reduced.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which a first presentation mode can be executed in a low base state, a second presentation mode can be executed in a low-probability high base state, and a third presentation mode can be executed in a high-probability high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of presentation modes may be executable in a low base state, three or more types of presentation modes may be executable in a high base state, or only one type of presentation mode may be executable.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a vertical scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode, a rotating display is performed in the second presentation mode, and a vertical scrolling display is performed in the third presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are variable displayed in each presentation mode can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a big win game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state, a probability-varying state, a small win game state, etc. may also be applied as an advantageous state.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the normal state is a low-probability, low-base state, and the special state, which is more likely to execute a variable display than the normal state and has a shorter average variable display period, is a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state and the special state a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a high probability state (high probability high base state), and an example of applying the present invention to a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the time-saving state or the high probability state when a jackpot game ends is given; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to pachinko game machines that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, which is one of the cases when the variable display result does not match in a low probability state, or that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after the RAM is cleared (a cold start of the pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game is called time-saving state A, the time-saving state controlled based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or RAM clear (cold start of pachinko game machine 1) is called time-saving state B, and the time-saving state controlled based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result is not a miss in a low probability state is called time-saving state C.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the time-saving state C described above, multiple types of variable display results that can be won in the time-saving state C can be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed can be varied depending on the type of variable display result when the time-saving state C is won.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine was used as an example of a game machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, and assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene,
the title name display scene is composed of a main title name display part which displays a character display of a main title name of the gaming machine, and then a subtitle name display part which displays a character display of a subtitle name of the gaming machine;
The light emission control means
at a timing when the main title display part is switched to the subtitle display part, the light emitting means is controlled using luminance data for the subtitle display part corresponding to the subtitle display part;
When a specific error occurs, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error luminance data table;
the luminance data for the subtitle name display part is luminance data for making the light-emitting means emit light in a light-emitting mode linked to an animation of the character display of the subtitle name,
a period from the occurrence of the cause of the specific error to the start of control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is shorter than a period from the resolution of the specific error to the end of control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images